2007 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M · 2020-03-15 · This manual describes features that may be...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 14Safety Belts ............................................ 16Child Restraints ...................................... 39Airbag System ........................................ 66Restraint System Check ......................... 82

Features and Controls ................................ 85Keys ....................................................... 87Doors and Locks .................................... 96Windows ............................................... 102Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 104Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 109Mirrors .................................................. 124OnStar® System ................................... 126Universal Home Remote System .......... 130Storage Areas ...................................... 141Sunroof ................................................ 143

Instrument Panel ....................................... 145Instrument Panel Overview ................... 148Climate Controls ................................... 168Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 179Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 199Audio System(s) ................................... 238

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 285Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 286Towing ................................................. 325

Service and Appearance Care .................. 337Service ................................................. 340Fuel ...................................................... 343Checking Things Under

the Hood ........................................... 348Headlamp Aiming ................................. 391Bulb Replacement ................................ 394

2007 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M

1

Windshield Replacement ....................... 401Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 401Tires ..................................................... 402Appearance Care .................................. 438Vehicle Identification ............................. 448Electrical System .................................. 449Capacities and Specifications ................ 454

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 457Maintenance Schedule .......................... 458

Customer Assistance Information ............. 477Customer Assistance and Information ... 478Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 494

Index .......................................................... 497

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,BUICK, the BUICK Emblem, and the nameLACROSSE are registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right to makechanges after that time without notice. For vehiclesfirst sold in Canada, substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for Buick Motor Divisionwhenever it appears in this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn aboutthe features and controls for the vehicle. Picturesand words work together in the owner manual toexplain things.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15863017 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reducethe hazard. Please read these cautions. If you donot, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Power Seats ................................................. 9Power Lumbar ............................................. 10Heated Seats .............................................. 10Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 11Head Restraints .......................................... 13Center Seat ................................................ 14

Rear Seats .................................................... 14Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 14

Safety Belts .................................................. 16Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 16Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 20How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 21Driver Position ............................................. 22Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 29Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 30Right Front Passenger Position ................... 30

Center Front Passenger Position ................. 31Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 32Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 35Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 38Safety Belt Extender ................................... 38

Child Restraints ............................................ 39Older Children ............................................. 39Infants and Young Children ......................... 42Child Restraint Systems .............................. 45Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 50Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 51Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 58Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ....................... 61Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 61

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 66Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 68When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 71What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 73How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 73What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................... 74Passenger Sensing System ......................... 75Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 80Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 81

Restraint System Check ............................... 82Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 82Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 83

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Power Seats

If the vehicle has power seats, the controls usedto operate them are located on the outboardside of the seats. To adjust the seat, do any of thefollowing:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire control up or down.

Driver’s Side shown, Passenger Side similar

9

Power Lumbar

Your driver’s seat may have power lumbar. Thecontrol is located on the outboard side of the seatcushion.

Press the front of the control to increase lumbarsupport. Press the rear of the control to decreaselumbar support.

Keep in mind that as your seating positionchanges, as it may during long trips, so should theposition of your lumbar support. Adjust the seatas needed.

Heated Seats

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the buttons arelocated on the climatecontrol panel.

Press the button once to activate the high heatsetting. Both indicator lights on the button will comeon. Press the button again to select the lowertemperature setting. Only one indicator light willcome on. Press the button a third time to turn theheat off.

This feature only works when the ignition is on.

10

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks.The lever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

Driver’s Side shown, Passenger Side similar

11

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright. Thensit well back in the seat and wear yoursafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

12

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it.

To lower the head restraint, press the button,located on the top of the seatback, and push thehead restraint down.

13

Center Seat

Your vehicle may have a front center seat. Thereare cupholders on the underside of the seatcushion. To use them, raise the seat cushion. Thisseat can also be converted to a storage area bylowering the armrest. See Center Console StorageArea on page 142.

For information on safety belts for this position,see Center Front Passenger Position on page 31.

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatIf your vehicle has this feature, both sides of therear seatback can be folded down. This givesdirect access to the trunk. Make sure thefront seats are not reclined. If they are, the rearseatback(s) may not fold down all the way.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

14

To lower the rearseatback, pull the tablocated on the outboardside of the seatbackand fold the seatbackforward.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

To raise the rear seatback, lift the seatback upuntil it latches. Push and pull on the seatback to besure it is locked in position.

The seatbacks should be kept in the upright,locked position when they are not being used toextend the cargo area.

15

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and yourpassengers to buckle your safety belts. See SafetyBelt Reminder Light on page 181 and PassengerSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 182.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

16

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a person wouldnot survive. But most crashes are in between. Inmany of them, people who buckle up can surviveand sometimes walk away. Without belts they couldhave been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

17

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

18

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

19

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

20

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect you fromthings beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 39 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 42. Follow those rules for everyone’sprotection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

21

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 38.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 29.

22

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

23

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

24


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

25


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

26


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

27


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

28

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of thebelt is centered on your shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but not falling offyour shoulder. Incorrect positioning of the shoulderbelt can reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt.

To move it down, pressdown on the releaselever (A) and move theheight adjuster to thedesired position. Youcan move the heightadjuster up just bypressing up on theshoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without squeezingthe release lever to make sure it has locked intoposition.

29

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it ismore likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key tomaking safety belts effective is wearing themproperly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 22.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.

When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latchplate up so that it is stored on the safety beltstitching, near the guide loop.

If your vehicle has a center passenger position, besure to use the correct buckle when buckling yourlap-shoulder belt. If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, see if you are using the buckle forthe center passenger position.

30

Center Front Passenger Position

Lap BeltIf your vehicle has a front bench seat, someonecan sit in the center position.

When you sit in the center front seating position,you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate andpull it along the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end asshown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as thelap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not longenough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 38.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

31

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

32

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 38.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

33

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

34

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between theedge of the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from its storage clip.

35

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then, placethe guide over the belt and insert the two edgesof the belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

36

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 32. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can take themout of the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose itsstorage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip.Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them inbetween the seatback and the interior body,leaving only the loop of the elastic cord exposed.

37

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, and probablyother new parts for your safety belt system. SeeReplacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash onpage 83.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in to orderit, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so theextender will be long enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someone else use it, anduse it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Never use it forsecuring child seats. To wear it, just attach it to theregular safety belt. For more information see theinstruction sheet that comes with the extender.

38

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should not crossthe face or neck. The lap belt should fit snuglybelow the hips, just touching the top of thethighs. It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

39

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,move the child toward the center of the vehicle.Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides onpage 35. If the child is sitting in the center rearseat passenger position, move the child towardthe safety belt buckle. In either case, be surethat the shoulder belt still is on the child’sshoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upperbody would have the restraint that beltsprovide.

40

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

41

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age mustbe restrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, theyneed to use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

42

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection for

CAUTION: (Continued)


adults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

43

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants always should besecured in appropriate infant restraints.

44

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

45

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

46

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seats havea five-point harness. A booster seat can also help achild to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system isa portable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured in thevehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,the child has to be secured within the childrestraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to be used ina vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.Then follow the instructions for the restraint.You may find these instructions on the restraintitself or in a booklet, or both.

47

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle. Make sure the childrestraint is properly installed in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions thatcame with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 51 formore information. A child can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both,and to this manual. The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

48

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

49

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

50

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killed bythe right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never be installed using onlythe top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments. The followingexplains how to attach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

51

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) onthe child restraint connects to the top tether anchorin the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

52

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints that have top tethers aredesigned for use with or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the top tether always tobe attached. In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have a top tether,and that the tether be attached. In the UnitedStates, some child restraints also have a top tether.Be sure to read and follow the instructions for yourchild restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for many childrestraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors has twolabels, near the creasebetween the seatbackand the seat cushion.

Rear Seat

53

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located onthe trim cover.

The top tether anchors are located under the trimcovers on the rear seatback filler panel. Flip openthe trim cover to access the anchors. Be sure to usean anchor located on the same side of the vehicleas the seating position where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 50 for additional information.

54

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

55

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraintso children cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safety beltssecured may cause damage to the safety belt orthe seat. When removing the child restraint,always remember to return the safety belts totheir normal, stowed position before folding therear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

56

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Open the top tether anchor trim cover

to expose the anchor.2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top

tether according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest and you areusing a single tether,route the tether overthe seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest and you areusing a single tether,route the tether overthe head restraint.

57

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest and you areusing a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 51.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in this position. Be sureto follow the instructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

58

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

59

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 51.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnect it.Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go backall the way. The safety belt will move freely againand be ready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

60

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killed bythe right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Do not secure a child restraint in the center frontseat position.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. Arear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facingchild restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 50.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system is designedto turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbagwhen an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a smallchild in a forward-facing child restraint or boosterseat is detected. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 75 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 183 for more information on this includingimportant safety information.

61

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, even



though it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraintin the right front seat position, move the seat as farback as it will go before securing the forward-facingchild restraint. See Power Seats on page 9.If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 51.There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child restraintin this position if a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be anchored.

62

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 51 if your child restraint hasa top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 75. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in a rear seat, evenif the airbag is off. If your child restraint isforward-facing, move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing the child restraint in thisseat. See Power Seats on page 9.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay lit whenyou turn the ignition to RUN or START. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 183.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

63

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt. Youshould not be able to pull more of the belt fromthe retractor once the lock has been set.

64


8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on theinstrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing thechild restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust theseat cushion if possible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

65

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and afrontal airbag for the right front passenger. Yourvehicle may also have roof-mounted side impactairbags. Roof-mounted side impact airbags areavailable for the driver and the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver and for the right frontpassenger and the passenger seated directlybehind that passenger.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG will appear onthe airbag covering on the ceiling near theside windows.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate in


66


rollover, rear crashes, or in many sidecrashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Roof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover or in rearcrashes. Everyone in your vehicle shouldwear a safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

67

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults,but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system norits airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 39 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 42.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 182 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

68

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and the person seated directlybehind the driver, it is located in the ceilingabove the side windows.

69

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger and the persondirectly behind that passenger, it is located inthe ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupantand an airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anything betweenan occupant and an airbag, and do notattach or put anything on the steeringwheel hub or on or near any other airbagcovering. And, if your vehicle hasroof-mounted side impact airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of your vehicleby routing the rope or tie down through anydoor or window opening. If you do, the pathof an inflating side impact airbag will beblocked. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear.

70

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint according tocrash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts,these airbags inflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontal impacts, fulldeployment occurs. If the front of your vehicle goesstraight into a wall that does not move or deform,the threshold level for the reduced deployment isabout 12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and thethreshold level for a full deployment is about18 to 22 mph (29 to 35.5 km/h). The threshold levelcan vary, however, with specific vehicle design, sothat it can be somewhat above or below this range.

71

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole)the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers,rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mountedside impact airbags. See Airbag System onpage 66. Roof-mounted side impact airbags areintended to inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. A roof-mounted side impact airbag willinflate if the crash severity is above the system’sdesigned threshold level. The threshold level canvary with specific vehicle design. Roof-mountedside impact airbags are not intended to inflate infrontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rearimpacts. A roof-mounted side impact airbag isintended to deploy on the side of the vehiclethat is struck.

72

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For roof-mounted side impact airbags,inflation is determined by the location and severityof the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle is in acrash. The sensing system triggers a release ofgas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag. Theinflator, airbag, and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag modules inside the steering wheel and inthe instrument panel in front of the right frontpassenger. For vehicles with roof-mounted sideimpact airbags, there are also airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderateto severe side collisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbagssupplement the protection provided by safety belts.Airbags distribute the force of the impact moreevenly over the occupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually. But the frontal airbagswould not help you in many types of collisions,including rollovers, rear impacts, and many sideimpacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion isnot toward the airbag. Side impact airbags wouldnot help you in many types of collisions, includingmany frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers,and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’sfrontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe sidecollisions for vehicles with side impact airbags.

73

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize theairbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsmay still be at least partially inflated minutes afterthe vehicle comes to rest. Some components of theairbag module — the steering wheel hub for thedriver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the rightfront passenger’s airbag, or the ceiling of yourvehicle near the side windows for vehicles withroof–mounted side impact airbags — may be hot fora short time. The parts of the airbag that come intocontact with you may be warm, but not too hot totouch. There may be some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbaginflation does not prevent the driver from seeing outof the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andturn on the hazard warning flashers when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors again, turnthe interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for those features.

74

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occurfrom the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afterairbags inflate, you will need some new partsfor the airbag system. If you do not get them,the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new systemwill include airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers other parts that need to be replaced.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 489.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can mean thatyour airbag system will not work properly. Seeyour dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system. Thepassenger airbag status indicator on the instrumentpanel will be visible when you turn your ignition keyto RUN or START.

The passenger airbagstatus indicator willlight ON and OFF forseveral seconds as asystem check.

If you use remote start to start your vehicle from adistance, if your vehicle has this feature, you maynot see the system check. When the system checkis complete, either the word ON or the word OFFwill be visible. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 183.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

75

The passenger sensing system works with sensorsthat are part of the right front passenger’s seat. Thesensors are designed to detect the presence of aproperly-seated occupant and determine if thepassenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled(may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


76


If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the offindicator on the instrument panel will light andstay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint following the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections and refer to Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position on page 61.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing thechild restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust theseat cushion if possible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

77

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sitting properly in the rightfront passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in theright front passenger’s seat, but the offindicator is lit, it could be because thatperson is not sitting properly in the seat.

If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask theperson to place the seatback in the fully uprightposition, then sit upright in the seat, centered on theseat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortablyextended. Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about two minutes. Thiswill allow the system to detect that person and thenenable the passenger’s airbag.

78

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’s seatmay not have the protection of the frontalairbag. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 182 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material fromthe seat cushion before reinstalling or securingthe child restraint and before a small occupant,including a small adult, sits in the right frontpassenger’s seat. You may want to consider not

using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment ifyour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 81 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

The passenger sensing system may suppress theairbag deployment when liquid is soaked into theseat. If this happens, the off indicator in thepassenger airbag status indicator and the airbagreadiness light on the instrument panel will be lit.The system should resume normal operation afterthe seat is allowed to dry. If the system operatesincorrectly after the seat has dried, have yourdealer check the system.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

79

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 495.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

80

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, frontend or side sheet metal, they may keep theairbag system from working properly. Also, theairbag system may not work properly if yourelocate any of the airbag sensors. If you haveany questions about this, you should contactCustomer Assistance before you modify yourvehicle. The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See Customer SatisfactionProcedure on page 478.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, ceiling headliner, ceiling and pillargarnish trim, roof-mounted airbag modules,or airbag wiring can affect the operation of theairbag system. If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phone numbersand addresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 478.

81

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 442for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, orthe side impact airbag covering (if equipped) onthe ceiling near the side windows, the airbagmay not work properly. You may have to replacethe airbag module in the steering wheel, boththe airbag module and the instrument panel forthe right front passenger’s airbag, or sideimpact airbag module and ceiling covering forroof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped.)Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

82

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help make sureyour restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash, thenyou need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and right front passenger’ssafety belt buckle assembly. Be sure to do so.Then the new buckle assembly will be there to helpprotect you in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace thedriver and front passenger’s safety belt buckleassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt buckle assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision, or ifyour airbag readiness light stays on after you startyour vehicle or while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 182.

83

✍ NOTES

84

Keys .............................................................. 87Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 89Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ................................................. 90Doors and Locks .......................................... 96

Door Locks ................................................. 96Power Door Locks ....................................... 97Delayed Locking .......................................... 97Automatic Door Lock ................................... 98Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ........ 98Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 98Lockout Protection ....................................... 99Trunk ........................................................ 100

Windows ...................................................... 102Power Windows ........................................ 103Sun Visors ................................................ 104

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 104Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 104PASS-Key® III ........................................... 106PASS-Key® III Operation ........................... 107

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 109New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 109Ignition Positions ....................................... 109Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 110Starting the Engine .................................... 111Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 112Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 114Parking Brake ........................................... 117Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 118Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 120Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 121Engine Exhaust ......................................... 122Running the Engine While Parked ............. 123

Mirrors ......................................................... 124Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 124Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 124Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror .......... 124Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® .......................................... 125Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 125Outside Power Heated Mirrors ................... 126Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 126

Section 2 Features and Controls

85

OnStar® System .......................................... 126Universal Home Remote System ................ 130

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED) ....................... 130

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 130

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED) ....... 131

Universal Home Remote System Operation(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 137

Storage Areas ............................................. 141Glove Box ................................................. 141Cupholder(s) .............................................. 141Center Console Storage Area .................... 142Convenience Net ....................................... 142

Sunroof ....................................................... 143

Section 2 Features and Controls

86

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

87

One key is used for theignition and all locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the key has abar-coded key tag. This tag may be removedby your dealer before it is delivered.

The vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theftsystem. The key has a transponder in thekey head that matches a decoder in the vehicle’s

instrument panel. The key will have PK3 stampedon it. If a replacement key or an additional keyis needed, it must be purchased from your dealeror certified locksmith.

Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmedbefore it will start the vehicle. See PASS-Key®

III on page 106 for more information onprogramming a new key.

In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 484for more information.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

88

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) systemoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any RKE system. Ifthe transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter towork, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 90.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

89

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked,and the trunk can be opened from about 3 feet(1 m) up to 60 feet (18 m) away with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. If your vehiclehas the remote start feature, you can also start thevehicle’s engine with the RKE transmitter.

The following functions may be available with yourvehicle’s RKE system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, the engine may be started fromoutside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter.See “Remote Vehicle Start” at the end ofthis section for more detailed information.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps may flash once toindicate locking has occurred, or the horn maychirp when the lock button is pressed again withinfive seconds from the previous press of thelock button. See “FOB LOCK FEEDBACK” underDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 229 foradditional information. If the vehicle has thecontent theft-deterrent system, pressing the lockbutton may also arm it. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 104.

RKE with Remote Start RKE without RemoteStart

90

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.The interior lamps will come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps canbe programmed to come on for a set amount oftime when the vehicle is unlocked using theRKE transmitter. See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTDELAY” under DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 229. If the vehicle has the contenttheft-deterrent system, pressing the unlock buttonon the RKE transmitter may disarm it. SeeContent Theft-Deterrent on page 104.

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and holdthis button for about one second to releasethe trunk lid. The transaxle must be in PARK (P)for this feature to operate.

L (Panic Alarm): Press this button to activate thealarm. The ignition must be in OFF orACCESSORY for the alarm to work. When thealarm button is pressed, the headlamps will flashand the horn will sound repeatedly for two minutes.The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved toRUN or the alarm button is pressed again.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your GM dealer. Rememberto bring any additional transmitters so theycan also be re-coded to match the new transmitter.Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.The vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in the RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

The KEY FOB BATT LOW message in thevehicle’s DIC will display if the RKE transmitterbattery is low.

91

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter, dothe following:

1. Insert a flat object, with a thin edge, into thenotch located below the panic alarm button,and separate the bottom half from the top halfof the transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metalobject to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive (+) side of the battery facing up.Use one three-volt, CR2032 battery, orequivalent type.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether. Make sure the cover is on tight, sowater will not get inside the transmitter.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

92

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside of the vehicle. It may also start upthe vehicle’s heating or air conditioning systemsand rear window defogger. When the remote startsystem is active, the climate control system willheat or cool the inside of the vehicle based on theoutside temperature. The rear window defoggerwill be turned on by the climate control systemwhen it is heating the inside of the vehicle. Normaloperation of the system will return after the keyis turned to the RUN position.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws mayrequire a person using remote start to havethe vehicle in view when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

The remote start feature provides two separatestarts per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutesof engine running time.

The remote vehicle start feature needs to be resetafter your vehicle’s engine is started two timesusing the transmitter’s remote start button.The remote start system is reset by inserting thevehicle’s key into the ignition switch and turning itto RUN. See Ignition Positions on page 109 forinformation regarding the ignition positions on yourvehicle.

The RKE transmitter with the remote start buttonprovides an increased range of operation. You canstart your vehicle from an average range of about492 feet (150 m) away. However the range may beless while the vehicle is running, and as a result,you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn itoff than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 89 foradditional information.

93

/ (Remote Start): If your vehicle has the remotestart feature, the RKE transmitter will have abutton with this symbol on it.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button for fourseconds or until the turn signal lampsflash. The vehicle’s doors will lock.

3. When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on while theengine is running.The engine will shut off automatically after10 minutes, unless a time extension has beendone or the vehicle’s key is inserted intothe ignition switch and turned to RUN.If you enter the vehicle after a remote start,and the engine is still running, insert thekey into the ignition switch and turn it to RUNto drive the vehicle.

4. To manually shut off a remote start, do any ofthe following. The parking lamps will turn off:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicleand press the remote start button.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch to RUN andthen to OFF.

Your vehicle’s engine may be started two timesusing the transmitter’s remote start feature. If onlyone remote start procedure has been done,since last driving the vehicle, or resetting theremote start system, the engine may be startedagain remotely following the remote startprocedure a second time

If the remote start procedure is used again beforethe first 10 minute time frame has ended, thefirst 10 minutes will immediately expire andthe second 10 minute time frame will start.

94

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate ifany of the follow occur:

• The remote start system is disabled throughthe DIC.

• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

• A door on the vehicle is open.

• The vehicle’s hood is open.

• The hazard warning flashers are on.

• The check engine light is on. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 190.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• Two remote vehicle starts have already beenprovided for that ignition cycle.

If a remote start is attempted and is unsuccessful,the Driver Information Center (DIC) will displayREMOTE START DISABLED.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start featureare shipped from the factory with the remotevehicle start system enabled. The system may beenabled or disabled through the DIC. See“REMOTE START” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 229 for additionalinformation. If your vehicle does not have the DICfeature, and remote vehicle start was installedat the dealership, you will need to have thedealership enable or disable the system.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote startready feature. This feature gives you the ability tolock or unlock your vehicle from about 492 feet(150 m) away and allows your dealer to addthe manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

95

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.



• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock thevehicle.

From the outside, turn the key in the driver’s doorlock cylinder briefly counterclockwise to unlockthe driver’s door. Turn and hold it to unlock all thedoors. You can also use the remote keylessentry transmitter. From the inside use the manualor power door locks.

96

Power Door LocksTo lock or unlock alldoors from inside thevehicle, use thepower door lock switchlocated on eitherfront door armrest.

Press the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors.The driver’s and front passenger’s power door lockswitch also releases the trunk lid. Press the topof the switch for about one and a half seconds toopen the trunk.If the vehicle has the content theft-deterrentsystem, the vehicle is programmed to arm thesystem with the power door lock switch. If yourvehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC) thisfeature can be turned off. See “Content Theft”under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 229.

Delayed LockingYour vehicle may have this feature. It delays thelocking of the vehicle’s doors for five seconds afterthe last door is closed. Two chimes will soundwhen the power door lock switch or the LOCKbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter ispressed when a door is open. The chimes indicatethat the delayed locking feature is on. If yourvehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), aDelayed Locking warning will be displayed.

The doors can be locked immediately by pressingthe power door lock switch or the LOCK buttonon the transmitter a second time.

The delayed locking feature will not activate whenthe ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY.

You can program this feature on or off through theDriver Information Center (DIC), if equipped.See “Delayed Locking” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 229.

97

Automatic Door LockThe vehicle’s doors are programmed to lock whenthe shift lever is moved into a forward gear.

If someone needs to get in or out of the vehicle afterthe doors have been locked, place the shift leverinto PARK (P). You may also unlock all doors usingthe power door lock switch or unlock one door usingthe inside manual door lock.

The automatic door lock feature cannot bedisabled.

Programmable Automatic DoorUnlockThe vehicle’s doors are programmed from thefactory to unlock when the shift lever is movedinto PARK (P).

If your vehicle has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC), there are different programmingoptions for unlocking the doors automatically.See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 229.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks. Theseprevent passengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. You mustopen the rear doors toaccess them.

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

98

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, if equipped, the powerdoor lock switch, or by lifting the rear doormanual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionThe lockout protection feature makes it moredifficult to lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’sdoor is open while the key is in the ignition, thedoor cannot be locked with the power doorlock switch.

This feature cannot guarantee that you will never belocked out of the vehicle. If the key is not left in theignition, or, if the manual door lock is used, the keycould still be locked inside the vehicle. Alwaysremember to take the key with you.

99

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with thetrunk lid open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open themall the way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 122.

Opening the TrunkTo open the trunk from the outside, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 90 for more information.

The ignition must be off, or the transaxle must bein PARK (P) to open the trunk.

Remote Trunk ReleaseThis feature is used to unlock the trunk from insidethe vehicle using the power door lock switch.

Press and hold the topof the driver’s or frontpassenger’s power doorlock switch to unlockthe trunk.

The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to unlockthe trunk.

100

Emergency Trunk Release HandleNotice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located on the trunk latch of thetrunk lid. This handle will glow following exposure tolight. If ever needed, pull the emergency trunkrelease handle to open the trunk from the inside.

Trunk Lid Pull Down Handle andTie-Down Features

Your vehicle has a trunk lid pull down handle (A)located on the inside of the trunk lid on the driver’sside of the vehicle. Use the handle to pull down thetrunk lid when closing it.

Your vehicle also has a tie-down feature (B) locatedon the inside the trunk lid on the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle that can be used to secure the trunk lidwhen large items are stored in the trunk.

101

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

102

Power Windows

The switches on the driver’s door armrest areused to control each of the windows. The powerwindow switches work while the ignition is in RUN,ACCESSORY, or while Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 110. Each passengerdoor has its own window switch.

To lower the window, press and hold the front ofthe switch to the first position until the window is atthe desired level. To raise the window, pull upand hold the front of the switch.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window switch has an express-downfeature labeled AUTO. This lets you lower thewindow completely without holding the switch.Press the front of the switch to the second positionand release.

To stop the window while it is lowering, briefly pullup on the switch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The driver’s windowswitches also include a lockout switch. Pressthe right side of the switch to prevent therear passengers from using their window switches.The driver can still control all the windows andthe front passenger can control their own windowwith the lockout on. Press the left side of theswitch to return to normal window operation.A visible red bar on the right side of the switchindicates that the lockout is off.

103

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down the sun visors.They can be detached from the center retainer andslid along the rod to cover different areas of thefront window and turned to cover the sidewindows.

Visor Vanity MirrorSwing down the sun visors and lift the cover toexpose the vanity mirror. Do not drive withthe cover lifted due to possible glare impedingother drivers behind or to the side of the vehicle.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

A red light located ontop of the instrumentpanel, toward the centerof the vehicle andnear the windshield, willflash slowly when thesystem is armed.

The theft-deterrent alarm system needs to beactivated through the Driver Information Center(DIC). See “CONTENT THEFT” under“Customization Menu Items” in DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 229. While armed, thedoors will not unlock with the power door lockswitch. The remote alarm will sound if someonetampers with the trunk or enters the vehicle withoutusing the remote keyless entry transmitter or key tounlock the doors. The horn will sound and theheadlamps will flash for up to two minutes. Thesystem will also cut off the fuel supply, preventingthe vehicle from being driven.

104

Arming with the Power Lock SwitchThe vehicle’s content theft-deterrent alarm systemcan be activated when the key is removed fromthe ignition and the power door lock switchof either the driver’s or front passenger’s door isused to lock the vehicle. The door needs tobe in the open position when pressing the powerdoor lock switch. The alarm system will notactivate if the door is closed when the power doorlock switch is pressed. This system can beactivated through the Driver Information Center(DIC). See “CONTENT THEFT” under“Customization Menu Items” in DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 229.

When the doors are locked using the power doorlock switch of either front door, the red light ontop of the instrument panel will start flashing at afast rate, indicating that the system is arming.After all the doors are locked there will be a timedelay and then the red light will begin to flashat a very slow rate, indicating the system is armed.

Arming with the Remote Keyless EntryTransmitterThe alarm system will arm when the remote keylessentry transmitter is used to lock the doors after thekey is removed from the ignition. The red light willcome on to indicate that the system is arming. Afterall doors are closed and locked, and after a timedelay, the red light will begin flashing at a very slowrate to show the system is armed.

Arming ConfirmationA red light located on top of the instrument panel,towards the center of the vehicle and near thewindshield, will flash slowly to confirm whenthe system is armed.

Disarming with the Remote KeylessEntry TransmitterThe alarm system will disarm when the remotekeyless entry transmitter is used to unlockthe doors. The red light will go out to show thatthe system is disarmed.

105

Disarming with Your KeyThe alarm system will disarm when the key isused to unlock the doors. The red light will stopflashing when the system is disarmed. If you wouldlike the key to disarm the alarm system, see“CONTENT THEFT” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 229 for more information.

PASS-Key® IIIYour PASS-Key® III system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.





PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponderin the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

106

PASS-Key® III Operation

Your vehicle is equippedwith PASS-Key® III(PersonalizedAutomotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrentsystem.

PASS-Key® III is a passive theft-deterrent system.This means nothing special needs to be doneto arm or disarm the system. It works when the keyis inserted or removed from the ignition.

PASS-Key III® uses a transponder in the ignitionkey that matches a decoder in the vehicle.

When the PASS-Key® III system senses that thewrong key has been inserted into the ignition, itshuts down the vehicle’s starter and fuel systems.

The starter will not work and fuel will stop flowing tothe engine. If someone tries to start the vehicleagain with the wrong key, the vehicle will not start.Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged to do so because of thehigh number of electrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine doesnot start and the STARTING DISABLED warningmessage on the Driver Information Center(DIC) comes on, the key may have a damagedtransponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 450. If the engine still does not start with theother key, the vehicle needs service. If thevehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. Seeyour dealer who can service the PASS-Key® IIIto have a new key made. In an emergency,contact Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 484 for moreinformation.

107

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder toaccept the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the programmed keys are lost or do notoperate, see your dealer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III to have keys made andprogrammed to the system.

To program the new key do the following:

1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stampedon it.

2. Insert the master key in the ignition and startthe engine. If the engine will not start, seeyour dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it toRUN within five seconds of removing theoriginal key.

5. The SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM warningmessage on the DIC will turn off, once thekey has been programmed. It may notbe apparent that the SERVICE THEFTSYSTEM warning message went on due tohow quickly the key is programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If the SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM warningmessage appears and stays on the DIC while thevehicle is being driven, the engine will be ableto be restarted if it is turned off. YourPASS-Key® III system, however, is not workingproperly and must be serviced by your dealer.The vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key® IIIsystem at this time.

If the PASS-Key® III key is lost or stolen, see yourdealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III to have a new key made.

108

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 327 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

Ignition PositionsWith the ignition key in the ignition, the key can beturned to four different positions:

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage orbreak the key. Use the correct key and turn thekey only with your hand. Make sure the keyis in all the way. If none of this works,then your vehicle needs service.

A (OFF): This is the only position in which theignition key can be inserted or removed. Thisposition locks the ignition and transaxle. It is atheft-deterrent feature.

109

B (ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio andwindshield wipers operate while the engine isoff. To use ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.

C (RUN): This position is where the key returnsto after the vehicle is started. This position displayssome of the warning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACCESSORY or RUN position with theengine off. You may not be able to start yourvehicle if the battery is allowed to drain foran extended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine.

A warning chime will sound and the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will display DRIVER’SDOOR AJAR when the driver’s door is opened ifthe ignition is in OFF, ACCESSORY and the key isin the ignition. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 208 for more information.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)If the vehicle has Retained Accessory Power(RAP), the power windows and radio will continueto operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignitionkey is turned to OFF unless a door is opened.

110

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position — this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transaxle gentlyto allow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components. Ifthe ignition key is turned to the START position,and then released when the engine beginscranking, the engine will continue cranking for afew seconds or until the vehicle starts. If theengine does not start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds, cranking will bestopped after 15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACCESSORY or OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

111

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and holding it there as youhold the key in START for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds betweeneach try, to allow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts, let go of the keyand accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engine and transaxlegently until the oil warms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, your engine might notperform properly. Any resulting damage wouldnot be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heatershould be plugged in a minimum of four hoursprior to starting your vehicle. At temperaturesabove 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is notrequired. Your vehicle may also have an internalthermostat in the plug end of the cord. Thiswill prevent operation of the engine coolant heaterwhen the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C)as noted on the cord.

112

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is attached to the undersideof the diagonal brace, which is located abovethe engine air cleaner/filter assembly.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-voltAC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

113

Automatic Transaxle OperationYour vehicle’s automatictransaxle may have ashift lever on thesteering column or onthe console betweenthe seats.

There is also a displaylocated on theinstrument panel clusterthat indicates thevehicle’s gear position.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brake andmove the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 118. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 327.

The positions for the shift lever are:

PARK (P): This position locks the vehicle’s frontwheels. It is the best position to use when theengine is started because the vehicle cannotmove easily.

Console Shift Lever

114

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. The vehicle hasan electronic shift lock release system. You mustfully apply the regular brakes before shiftingfrom PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. If youcannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure onthe shift lever by pushing it all the way intoPARK (P) as you maintain brake application.Then move the shift lever into another gear.See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 120

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

To rock the vehicle back and forth in order to getit out of snow, ice, or sand without damagingthe transaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 318.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engineis running at high speed is dangerous.Unless your foot is firmly on the brakepedal, your vehicle could move veryrapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is runningat high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice thatit is moving slowly or not shifting gears asyou increase speed may damage the transaxle.Have your vehicle serviced right away. Youcan drive in SECOND (2) when you are drivingless than 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D)for higher speeds until then.

115

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If more power is needed for passing, and thevehicle is:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator pedal all the way down.By doing this the vehicle will automaticallyshift down to the next gear and havemore power.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see Skiddingunder Loss of Control on page 302.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving. However it reduces vehicle speedmore than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.You might choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D)when driving on hilly, winding roads, whentowing a trailer, so there is less shifting betweengears and when going down a steep hill.

Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph(90 km/h) may damage the transaxle. Also,shifting into SECOND (2) at speeds above65 mph (105 km/h) can cause damage. Drive inTHIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehiclespeed even more than THIRD (3) without usingyour brakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.It can help control your speed as you go downsteep mountain roads, but then you wouldalso want to use your brakes off and on.

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without usingyour brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inFIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, thetransmission will not shift into first gear until thevehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

116

Parking Brake

To set the parkingbrake, hold the regularbrake pedal downwith your right foot.Push down the parkingbrake pedal withyour left foot.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down with your right foot and push theparking brake pedal with your left foot. Whileyou lift your left foot, the parking brake pedal willfollow it to the released position.

A warning chime will sound and PARKINGBRAKE ON will display in the DIC if the parkingbrake is set, the ignition is on, and the vehiclespeed is greater than 5 mph (8km/h). For moreinformation see Brake System Warning Lighton page 186 and DIC Warnings and Messageson page 208.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and parking on anyhill, see Towing a Trailer on page 327. Thatsection shows what to do first to keep the trailerfrom moving.

117

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 327.

Steering Column Shift Lever1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the

parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P)like this:

• Pull the lever toward you.

• Move the lever up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Console Shift Lever1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the

parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P)position by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing it all the way towardthe front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

118

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift leveraway from PARK (P) without first pushing thebutton. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into PARK (P) properly before youleave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park (P) on page 118.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).

119

Shifting Out of Park (P)

Automatic Transaxle Shift LockThis vehicle has an electronic shift lock releasesystem. The shift lock release is designed to:• Prevent ignition key removal unless the

shift lever is in PARK (P)• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of

PARK (P) unless the ignition is in a positionother than OFF.

The shift lock is always functional except inthe case of a an uncharged or low voltage(less than 9 volt) battery.

If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or abattery with low voltage, try charging or jumpstarting the battery. See Jump Starting onpage 385.

Console ShiftIf your console shift cannot be moved out ofPARK (P)

1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.

2. Turn the ignition to the ACESSORY or RUNposition. See Ignition Positions on page 109for more information.

3. Let up on the shift lever and make sure the shiftlever is pushed all the way into PARK (P).

4. Then, move the shift into the desired gear.

If you still cannot move the shift lever fromPARK (P), consult your dealer or a professionaltowing service.

Column ShiftIf your park lock cable cannot be moved out ofPARK (P)

1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.

2. Turn the ignition key to the ACCESSORY orRUN position. See Ignition Positions onpage 109 for more information.

3. Shift out of the PARK (P) position to theNEUTRAL (N) position.

4. Move the vehicle to a safe location.

If you still cannot move the shift lever fromPARK (P), consult your dealer or a professionaltowing service.

120

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

121

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

122

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 122.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 314.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 118.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 327.

123

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behindyour vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to moveit up or down and side to side. The day/nightcontrol at the bottom of the mirror lets you adjustthe mirror to avoid glare from the lamps behindyou. Turn the control to the right for nighttimeconditions and to the center for daytime conditions.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

The vehicle may have a mirror with Onstar®.While sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behindyour vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to moveit up and down and side to side.

The mirror has a day/night control located at thebottom. Turn the control to the right for thenight position to reduce glare from other vehicles’headlamps. Turn the control to the front for theday position.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 126for more information about the services OnStar®

provides.

Automatic Dimming Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behindyour vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to moveit up or down and side to side.

The vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror that darkens gradually to reducethe glare of headlamps from behind. Pressthe button in the center of the mirror to turn thisfeature on or off.

One photocell on the front of the mirror senseswhen it is becoming dark outside. Anotherphotocell, facing rearward, senses headlampsbehind you.

To keep the photocells operating well, occasionallyclean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.

124

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®

While sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behindyour vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to moveit up or down and side to side.

The vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with the OnStar® System.The automatic dimming feature is turned on or offby pressing the left button, located on the lowerpart of the mirror, for up to three seconds.When turned on, this mirror functions like theautomatic dimming rearview mirror describedpreviously. See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 124.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 126for more information about the services OnStar®

provides.

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrors,are located on thedriver’s door armrest.

Move the selector switch located below thefour-way control pad to the left or right to chooseeither the driver’s side or passenger’s sidemirror. To adjust a mirror, use the arrows locatedon the four-way control pad to move the mirrorin the desired direction. Adjust each outside mirrorso that a little of the vehicle and the area behindit can be seen while sitting in a comfortable drivingposition. Keep the selector switch in the centerposition when not adjusting either outside mirror.

125

Outside Power Heated MirrorsFor information on the operation of the outsidepower mirrors see Outside Power Mirrors onpage 125.

If the vehicle has heated mirrors, they will warmup to melt ice and snow, and remove condensationwhen the defroster is turned on. See DualAutomatic Climate Control System on page 172 orClimate Control System on page 168.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat, but it also makesthings look farther away than they really are.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

126

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar®

button to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hoursa day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.

For more information, press the OnStar® button tospeak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

Available Services with Safe &Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification(AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor ( U.S. Only)

127

Available Services included with Directions& Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a BellMobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owners Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 280 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

128

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services, yourvehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability ofrecording and transmitting vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent to an OnStar® CallCenter at the time of an OnStar® button press,Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACNsystem deploys. The vehicle information usuallyincludes your GPS location and, in the event of acrash, additional information regarding the accidentthat your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. thedirection from which your vehicle was hit). Whenyou use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sendsOnStar® your GPS location so that we can provideyou with location-based services.OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle isin a place where OnStar® has an agreement with awireless service provider for service in that area.OnStar® service also cannot work unless you are ina place where the wireless service providerOnStar® has hired for that area has coverage,network capacity and reception when the service isneeded, and technology that is compatible with theOnStar® service. Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remote or enclosedareas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®

equipment is active.

129

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTV06A.




The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTV06A.


Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

130




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.




The Canadian Registration ID number is2791021849A.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below. Ifthere is one triangular LED above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up to threeremote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

131

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, forfuture programming. You only need the originalremote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.

132

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

To program up to three channels,

1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

Example of Switch Settings

133

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two and one-halfminutes, enter each switch setting into theUniversal Home Remote System. Pushone button for each switch as follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–8, choosing adifferent function button in Step 7 than what youused for the garage door opener.

134

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up to threechannels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4 dependingon your garage control unit. If you cannot locatethe “learn” button, refer to the owners guide foryour garage door opener.

135

3. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to20 seconds.

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–5, choosing adifferent function button in Step 3 than what youused for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for approximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, located directlyabove the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 482.

136

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructionsbelow. If your vehicle has three round LED abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.If you have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section or, for assistance, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 482.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installedin your hand-held transmitter for quicker andmore accurate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal.

137

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up to threechannels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly for twoseconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 followingto complete the programming of a rolling-codeequipped device, most commonly, a garagedoor opener.

138

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release it.Immediately press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds, thenrelease it. Immediately, press and hold thesame button a third time for two seconds,then release.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate your rolling-code equipped device.

To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” You donot want to repeat Step 1, as this will eraseall previous programming from the Universal HomeRemote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

139

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 482.

140

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Theglove box may have a light inside and a shelflocated at the top of the glove box.

Cupholder(s)

If your vehicle is thefive-passenger model,there is a cupholderin front of the centerconsole.

The cupholder has an arm that adjusts totwo positions to fit either a large cup ortwo smaller cups.

If your vehicle is the six-passenger model, there is acupholder located underneath the seat. To access,pull the center seat forward. The cupholder has asupport that adjusts to two positions to fit either alarge cup or two smaller cups.

141

Center Console Storage AreaIf your vehicle has a five-passenger console, thecenter console has a padded lid that can beused as an armrest. Lift the armrest lid to accessa storage bin with a coin holder and a CDholder. Located under the lid is a card clip.

If your vehicle has a six-passenger console, thereis a flip and fold center armrest that allows youto choose between a three-passenger frontrow bench seat or a center console. For moreinformation see Center Seat on page 14. Inthe upward position the armrest acts as a backsupport for the front row bench seat. Flip thecenter armrest down and it can be used as anarmrest for the driver and passenger seat. Lift thearmrest lid to access the storage area.

Convenience NetThe vehicle may have a convenience net locatedon the back wall of the trunk.

Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net.It can help keep them from falling over.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Storethose in the trunk as far forward as possible.

Unhook the net so that it will lie flat when not in use.

142

SunroofThe vehicle may have a sunroof. It includes asliding glass panel and a sunshade.

The sunroof control ison the headliner, by themap lamps.

The sunroof control works only when the ignitionis on or in ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 110.

To raise the sunroof to the vent position, open thesunshade by hand, then press the back of thecontrol. Push and hold the front of the control toclose the sunroof from the vent position.

With the sunroof in the vent position, press andrelease the back of the control to express-open thesunroof. The sunshade will automatically openwith the sunroof. To stop the express-openfunction, press the back of the control again.

To close the sunroof, press and hold the front ofthe control. To stop the sunroof, release thecontrol. The sunshade must be closed manually.

The sunroof panel cannot be opened or closedif your vehicle has an electrical failure.

143

✍ NOTES

144

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 148Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 150Other Warning Devices ............................. 150Horn .......................................................... 150Tilt Wheel .................................................. 151Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 152Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 152Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 153Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 153Windshield Wipers ..................................... 153Windshield Washer .................................... 154Cruise Control ........................................... 154Exterior Lamps .......................................... 158Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/

Automatic Headlamp System .................. 159Fog Lamps ................................................ 160Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................. 160Interior Lamps ........................................... 161Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 161Courtesy Lamps ........................................ 161Entry Lighting ............................................ 161Delayed Entry Lighting .............................. 162Theater Dimming ....................................... 162Delayed Exit Lighting ................................. 162

Perimeter Lighting ..................................... 163Overhead Console Reading Lamps ........... 163Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps .......... 163Electric Power Management ...................... 163Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 164Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 164Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 167Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 168

Climate Controls ......................................... 168Climate Control System ............................. 168Dual Automatic Climate Control System .... 172Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 177Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 178

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 179Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 180Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 181Tachometer ............................................... 181Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 181Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 182Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 182Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 183Charging System Light .............................. 185Brake System Warning Light ..................... 186

Section 3 Instrument Panel

145

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 187Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 187Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 188Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 189Low Coolant Warning Light ....................... 189Tire Pressure Light .................................... 190Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 190Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 194Change Engine Oil Light ........................... 195Security Light ............................................ 195Cruise Control Light .................................. 195Reduced Engine Power Light .................... 196Highbeam On Light ................................... 196Headlamps Suggested Light ...................... 196Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ............... 197Door Ajar Light .......................................... 197Trunk Ajar Light ........................................ 197Service Vehicle Soon Light ........................ 197Fuel Gage ................................................. 198Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 198Check Gas Cap Light ................................ 199

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 199DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 200DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) ..................... 206DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 208DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 229

Audio System(s) ......................................... 238Setting the Time ........................................ 239Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 240Radio with CD (Uplevel) ............................ 245Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 252Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 260Using an MP3 ........................................... 272XM Radio Messages ................................. 278Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 280Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 280Radio Reception ........................................ 281Care of Your CDs ..................................... 282Care of the CD Player .............................. 282Backglass Antenna .................................... 283XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 284Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 284

Section 3 Instrument Panel

146

✍ NOTES

147

Instrument Panel Overview

148

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 177.

B. Interior Lamps Control. See Interior Lamps onpage 161.

C. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps onpage 158. Fog Lamp Control. See FogLamps on page 160.

D. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 152.

E. Cruise Controls. See Cruise Control onpage 154.

F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 180.

G. DIC Buttons (If Equipped) and Hazard WarningFlasher Button. See DIC Operation andDisplays on page 200 and Hazard WarningFlashers on page 150.

H. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 183.

I. Audio System Controls. See Audio System(s)on page 238.

J. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 349.

K. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake onpage 117.

L. Tilt Lever (If Equipped). See Tilt Wheel onpage 151. Telescoping Column Lever(If Equipped). See Tilt Wheel on page 151.

M. Horn. See Horn on page 150.N. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).

See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 280.

O. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 118.

P. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 167.

Q. Climate Controls. See Climate Control Systemon page 168 or Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 172.

R. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 141.

149

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in the ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set themup at the side of the road about 300 feet(100 m) behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

150

Tilt WheelIf the vehicle has a tilt wheel it lets you adjust thesteering wheel before you drive. The steeringwheel can be raised to the highest level to give thedriver’s legs more room when you enter and exitthe vehicle.

The lever that allowsyou to tilt the steeringwheel is located onthe left side of thesteering column.

To tilt the wheel, pull the lever down. Then movethe wheel to a comfortable position and pullthe lever up to lock the wheel in place.

Telescoping ColumnIf the vehicle has a telescoping column on thesteering wheel that adjusts the distance ofthe steering wheel to the driver without movingthe driver’s seat.

The lever that makesthis adjustment islocated on the left side ofthe steering column andbehind the tilt lever, if thevehicle has this feature.

To adjust the steering wheel, pull the steering wheelcolumn lever down and push or pull the steeringwheel to a comfortable position. Then pull the leverup to lock the wheel in place.

Do not drive the vehicle unless the telescopingcolumn is locked.

151

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See

Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 152.• 2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 153.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 153.• NWindshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers

on page 153.• LQ Windshield Washer. See Windshield

Washer on page 154.For information on the headlamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 158.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsTo signal a turn, move the lever up or down.The lever returns to its original position when theturn is completed.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until thelane change is completed. The lever will returnto its original position when released.Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turnor lane change, or that fail to work, may indicatea burned-out signal bulb or fuse. Other drivers willnot see the signal. See Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps on page 397 and Taillamps, TurnSignal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps and Back-upLamps on page 398 for turn signal bulbreplacement procedures. Also see Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 450 for location of fuses.A chime will sound if the turn signal is left onfor more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km).

152

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunctionlever away from you.

When the high beamsare on, a light on theinstrument panel clusteralso will be on if theignition is on.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps momentarily to signal a driver infront of you that you want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlampscome on, then release the lever to turn them off.

Windshield WipersBe sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thaw them. Damagedwiper blades may not clear the windshield well,making it harder to see and drive safely. If theblades do become damaged, install new blades orblade inserts. For more information, see WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 401.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

You control the windshield wipers by turning theband with the wiper symbol on it.

8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn theband to mist. Hold it there until the wipersstart. Then let go. The wipers will stop afterone wipe. If you want more wipe cycles, holdthe band on mist longer.

153

6 (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a longor short delay between wiping cycles. This canbe very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the bandto choose the delay time. The closer to the topof the lever, the shorter the delay.

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at lowspeed, turn the band away from you to thefirst solid band past the delay settings.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turnthe band further, to the second solid band past thedelay settings.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

Windshield Washer

LQ (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle markedwith the windshield washer symbol at the topof the multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid onthe windshield, push the paddle. The wipers willclear the window and then either stop or return toyour preset speed.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speedof about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

154

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when theTraction Control System (TCS), if your vehiclehas this feature, begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automatically disengage.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 294.When road conditions allow you to safely useit again, the cruise control can be turned back on.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onleft side of thesteering wheel.

T (On/Off): Press this button to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicator will be litwhen cruise control is on.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this buttonto make the vehicle accelerate or resume toa previously set speed.

SET–: Press this button to set the speed or makethe vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancelcruise control.

155

Setting Cruise ControlCruise control will not work if the parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

The cruise control light on the instrument panelcluster will come on after the cruise controlhas been set to the desired speed. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 180.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Press the cruise control on/off button.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press and release the SET– button located onthe steering wheel.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set the cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This shutsoff the cruise control, but it does not need tobe reset.

Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, press the +RES button on the steeringwheel. The vehicle will go back to your chosenspeed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo increase the cruise speed while usingcruise control:

• Press and hold the +RES button on thesteering wheel until you reach your newdesired speed, then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,press the +RES button.

156

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on thesteering wheel until you reach the lower speedyou want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, pressthe SET– button on the steering wheelbriefly. Each time this is done, you will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase vehiclespeed. When you take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to the cruise speed youset earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain your speed. When going downhill, youmay have to brake or shift to a lower gear tokeep your speed down. Of course, applying thebrake ends the cruise control. Many driversfind this to be too much trouble and do not usecruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the [ (cancel) button on thesteering wheel.

• Press the T (on/off) button on thesteering wheel.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory is erased byturning off the cruise control or the ignition.

157

Exterior Lamps

The control locatedto the left of the clusteron the instrumentpanel, operates theexterior lamps.

P (On/Off): Turn the control to this position tomanually turn the headlamps on and off. This is amomentary control that will spring back toAUTO when released.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to set your headlamps in automatic mode.AUTO mode, if enabled, will turn the exteriorlamps on and off automatically depending on howmuch light is available outside the vehicle.

To enable automatic lighting, do any of thefollowing:

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to offand release the control. It will return back tothe AUTO position by itself.

• Turn the headlamp control from the parkinglamp position to AUTO.

• Turn the headlamp control from the headlampposition to AUTO.

To disable automatic lighting, do any of thefollowing:

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to offand release the control. It will return back tothe AUTO position by itself.

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to theparking lamp position.

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to theheadlamp position.

158

< (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn your headlamps on, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

A warning chime will sound if the driver’s door isopened when the ignition switch is turned toOFF or ACCESSORY and the headlamps orparking lamps are on.

- (Foglamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps,press this button to turn them on and off. See FogLamps on page 160 for additional information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. DRL lamps are required to function atall times on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panelmakes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system will make the low-beamheadlamps come on at reduced brightness whenthe following conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps control is off.

• The parking brake is released.

While the DRL are on, only the vehicle’s low-beamheadlamps will be on at reduced brightness.The turn signal, taillamps, sidemarker, and otherlamps will not be on. The instrument panel will notbe lit up either.

159

When it is dark enough outside, the DRL will turnoff and the vehicle’s headlamps and parkinglamps will turn on. The other lamps that come onwith the headlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside, the headlampswill go off and the DRL will come on.

To idle the vehicle with the DRL off, turn theexterior lamp control off and then do one of thefollowing:

• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parkinglamp position.

• Turn the exterior lamp control to theheadlamp position.

• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO tooff and back to AUTO.

This feature is not available for vehicles first soldin Canada.

To turn off the automatic headlamp feature when itis dark outside, move the exterior lamp controlto the parking lamp position. The parking lampsremain on and the headlamps turn off. Thefog lamps also go on if they were on previously.

As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Fog Lamps

If your vehicle has foglamps, the button islocated in the center ofthe exterior lampscontrol on the left sideof the steering column.

Press the fog lamps button to turn the lampson or off.

While the high-beam headlamps are on, the foglamps are off.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the parking lamps or headlamps have been lefton after the ignition has been turned to off, theexterior lamps will turn off after about 10 minutes.This protects the battery from being drained.

Use the exterior lamp control to turn the lampsback on, if they are still needed.

160

Interior Lamps

Your interior lampscontrol is located next tothe exterior lampscontrol and to the left ofthe steering wheel onthe instrument panel.

9 (Off): Turn the control to this position todisable courtesy lamps, entry lighting, delayedentry lighting, and delayed exit lighting.

1 (Door): Turn the control to this position to turnthe interior lamps on when any door is open andwhen the ignition key is removed from the ignition.

+ (On): Turn the control to this position to turnon the interior lamps.

The interior lamps can be controlled, orautomatically turned on or off under certainconditions. They are explained in the following text.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThe instrument panel lights can be brightened ordimmed by pressing the center knob of theinterior lamp controls until it pops out. Turn theknob clockwise to brighten the lights orcounterclockwise to dim them.

Courtesy LampsCourtesy lamps come on to make it easier toenter and exit the vehicle. These lamps will comeon when the interior lamp control is in the doorposition and any door is opened.

Entry LightingThe courtesy lamps will come on and stay on for aset time whenever the interior lamp control is inthe door position and the UNLOCK button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed.

The lamps will stay on while a door is opened andthen turn off automatically about 25 secondsafter it is closed. If the UNLOCK button is pressedand a door is not opened, the lamps will turn offafter about 25 seconds.

161

Entry lighting includes a feature called theaterdimming. With theater dimming, the lamps do notturn off at the end of the delay time. Instead, theyslowly dim after the delay time and then turn off.

The courtesy lamps turn off when the ignition keyis turned to RUN or START. They will comeon again when a door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting lights the vehicle’s interiorfor a period of time after all the doors havebeen closed.

After all the doors have been closed, the delayedentry lighting feature will continue to work untilone of the following occurs:

• The ignition is in RUN.

• The doors are locked.

• 25 seconds has passed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain on.

Theater DimmingThis feature allows for a three to five-second fadeout of the courtesy lamps instead of immediateturn off.

Delayed Exit LightingThis feature can be programmed either on or offusing the Driver Information Center. See DICVehicle Personalization on page 229 under INT(Interior) LIGHTS KEYS REMOVED. Whenactivated, this feature illuminates the interior for aperiod of time after the ignition key is removedfrom the ignition.The ignition must be off and the interior lampcontrol must be in the door position for delayedexit lighting to work. When the ignition key isremoved, interior illumination will activateand remain on until one of the following occurs:• The ignition is in RUN.• The power door locks are activated.• 25 seconds has passed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain on.

162

Perimeter LightingPerimeter lighting provides a period of exteriorvehicle lighting. Perimeter lighting activates whenthe key is removed from the ignition or the vehicle isunlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. The amount of time the exterior lampswill remain on can be programmed using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See “EXIT LIGHTDELAY” under DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 229 for additional information.

Overhead Console Reading LampsYour vehicle may have reading lamps locatedon the overhead console. Press the lens to turnthem on and off.

Rear Assist Handle Reading LampsYour vehicle may have reading lamps locatednear the rear assist handles. Press the lens to turnthem on and off.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)that estimates the battery’s temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltage for bestperformance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

163

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might displayBattery Saver Active. If this message is displayed,it is recommended that the driver reduce theelectrical loads as much as possible. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 208.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis helps prevent the vehicle’s battery fromdraining in case the interior courtesy lamps,reading lamps, trunk lamp, underhood lamp, glovebox lamps, or sun visor vanity lamps, if equipped,are accidently left on. If any of these lampsare left on while the ignition is off, they willautomatically turn off after 10 minutes. The lampswill not come back on again until one of thefollowing occurs:• The ignition is turned on.• The interior lamps control is turned off, then to

door or on.

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)Your vehicle may be equipped with Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA). URPA is designed to helpyou park while in REVERSE (R) and operates onlyat speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can helpyou avoid colliding with objects such as parkedvehicles. The system can detect objects 5 feet(1.5 m) behind your vehicle and tell you how closethose objects are to your rear bumper.

164

The URPA display is located inside the vehicle,above the rear window. It has three color-codedlights that can be seen through the rearview mirroror by turning around.

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)system does not replace driver vision.URPA does not:

• Operate above speeds of3 mph (5 km/h).

• Detect objects more than 5 feet(1.5 meters) behind the vehicle. Thisdistance may be less during warmeror humid weather.

• Detect objects that are below thebumper, underneath the vehicle, orthat are very close to the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.



So if you do not use proper care beforebacking up, you could hit a vehicle, child,pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death. Eventhough the vehicle has the URPA system,always check carefully before backing upby checking behind your vehicle.

How the System WorksURPA comes on automatically when the shift leveris moved into REVERSE (R). When the systemcomes on, the three lights on the display will brieflyilluminate to let you know that the system isworking. If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R)at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the redlight will flash to remind you the system doesnot work at this speed.

165

The first time an object is detected while inREVERSE (R), a chime will sound and thefollowing will occur in sequence, depending on thedistance from the object:

• At 5 feet (1.5 m) a chime will sound andone amber light will be lit.

• At 40 inches (1.0 m) both amber lights willbe lit.

• At 20 inches (0.5 m) a continuous chime willsound and all three lights (amber/amber/red)will be lit.

• At 1 foot (0.3 m) a continuous chime willsound and all three lights (amber/amber/red)will flash.

URPA can detect objects 3 inches (7.6 cm) andwider, and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) tall,but it cannot detect objects that are above trunklevel. In order for the rear sensors to recognize anobject, it must be within operating range.

If the URPA system is not functioning properly, thedisplay will flash red, indicating that there is aproblem. The light will also flash red while driving ifa trailer is attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle orobject is on the back of, or hanging out of your

trunk. The light will continue to flash until the traileror the object is removed and your vehicle is drivenforward at least 15 mph (25 km/h).

It may also flash red if the ultrasonic sensors arenot kept clean. So be sure to keep your rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush ormaterials such as paint or the system maynot work properly. If after cleaning the rear bumperand driving forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h),the display continues to flash red, see yourGM dealer. For cleaning instructions, see WashingYour Vehicle on page 442.

It may also flash red if your vehicle is moving inREVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph(5 km/h). Other conditions that may affect systemperformance include things like the vibrationsfrom a jackhammer or the compression ofairbrakes on a very large truck.

As always, drivers should use care when backingup a vehicle. Always look behind you, beingsure to check for other vehicles, obstructions andblind spots.

166

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlets enable powerelectrical equipment such as a cellular telephoneor a CB radio to be used inside the vehicle.

Your vehicle has 12-volt outlets. One outlet islocated on the center console below the climatecontrols. There may be another outlet locatedinside the center storage console or in the flip andfold console.

Open the cover to use the outlet. Be sure to closethe cover when the outlet is not in use.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not use equipment exceeding maximumamperage rating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer before adding electrical equipment.

Certain power accessory plugs may not becompatible to the power accessory outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealer.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment pluggedin for an extended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain the battery. Power isalways supplied to the outlets. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum 20 ampere rating.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

167

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have a removable ashtray andcigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter may belocated under the climate control system.The removable ashtray can be placed into thefront console cupholder.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle.Never put flammable items in the ashtray.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way,and let go. When the heating element is ready,it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to back awayfrom the heating element when it is hot. Damagefrom overheating may occur to the lighter orheating element, or a fuse could be blown. Donot hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.Do not use equipment exceeding maximumamperage rating of 20 amperes.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature andit is activated, the climate control system willautomatically cool the vehicle if the temperature isgreater than 90°F (32°C) and heat the vehicle if thetemperature is below 37°F (3°C). If the temperatureis between 37°F (3°C) and 90°F (32°C), the lastcontrol setting selected when the engine wasrunning will be used. Normal operation and the lastsetting of the climate control system will return afterthe key is turned to the RUN position.

168

Operation

OFF: Turn the left knob to this position to turn theclimate control system off.

9 (Fan): Turn the knob by this symbol, locatedon the left side of the climate control panel,clockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. The fan speed will betemporarily reduced between the transitionto a new mode. The fan will resume the originalspeed when the transition to the new modeis complete.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the temperature inside your vehicle.

Use the right knob to select from thefollowing modes:

H (Vent): This mode directs outside air to theinstrument panel outlets. If driving in citytraffic, and the vehicle is stopped and idling, or theweather is hot, turning on the recirculationmode helps to prevent the air inside the vehiclefrom becoming stale. After five minutes recirculatewill allow some outside air into the vehicle.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets, and the remainingair to the floor outlets. Some air may be directedtoward the windshield. Slightly cooler air is directedto the instrument panel outlets and warmer air isdirected to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed towardthe side window outlets and a little air directed tothe windshield.

In this mode, the system will automatically useoutside air. The air conditioning compressor will beengaged unless the outside temperature is 40°F(4°C) or below.

169

You can also select modes by using thefollowing buttons:

h (Recirculate): Press this button to recirculatecabin air through the vehicle. It can be used tohelp reduce the outside air and odors thatenter your vehicle or to help heat or cool the airinside your vehicle quicker. An indicator light belowthe button will come on in this mode. Operationin this mode during periods of high humidityand cool outside temperatures may result inincreased window fogging. If window fogging isexperienced, select the defrost mode. To preventthe air inside the vehicle from becoming stale,after five minutes recirculate will allow someoutside air into the vehicle.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. Whenthis button is pressed, an indicator light below thebutton will come on to let you know the airconditioning is activated. Air conditioning can beselected in any mode as long as the fan switch ison. The indicator light will change with eachbutton press even when conditions preventoperation.

On hot days during the vehicle’s initial start-up,open the windows to let hot inside air escape; thenclose them. This helps to reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helpsthe system to operate more efficiently.

For quicker cool down on hot days, do thefollowing:

1. Select the vent air mode.

2. Select the recirculation mode.

3. Select the air conditioner.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice asmall amount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

Using these settings together for long periodsof time may cause the air inside the vehicle tobecome too dry. To prevent this, after five minutesrecirculate will allow some outside air intothe vehicle.

170

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the vehicle is a result of highhumidity causing moisture to condense on thecool window glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear frost or fog from the windshield.Use the defog mode to clear the windows ofcondensation and to warm the vehicle’s occupants.Use the defrost mode to remove frost orcondensation from the windshield quickly.

See “Rear Window Defogger” later in this sectionfor information on clearing the rear window offog or ice.

Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all windowsare clear.

- (Defog): This mode directs half of the air to thewindshield and the side window outlets and half tothe floor outlets. When you select this mode, thesystem turns recirculation off and runs the airconditioning compressor unless the outsidetemperature is near or below freezing. Pressing therecirculation button will have no effect other thanturning on the indicator light while in defog mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield and the side window outlets, withsome air directed to the floor outlets. Whenyou select this mode, the system turnsrecirculation off and runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature is nearor below freezing. Pressing the recirculationbutton will have no effect other than turning on theindicator light while in defrost mode.

171

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear): Press the button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator light belowthe button will come on to let you know that therear window defogger is activated.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in RUN. The rear window defoggerwill stay on for about 20 minutes after the button ispressed. If turned on again, the defogger willonly run for about 20 minutes before turning off.The defogger can also be turned off by pressingthe button again or by turning off the engine.

Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle.

172

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button forautomatic control of the inside temperature, the airdelivery mode, and the fan speed. There mightbe a delay of two to three minutes before the fancomes on when the automatic operation isused in cold weather. For the automatic system tofunction, the temperature must be set between61°F (15°C) and 89°F (32°C).

1. Adjust the temperature to a comfortablesetting.

2. Press the PASS button or the up or downarrows on the passenger side to turn thepassenger temperature set on and off. Whenturned on, the passenger temperature willbe the same as the driver setting. Press theup or down arrow on passenger side to adjustthe passenger temperature setting.When the passenger’s temperature set is off,the passenger display will be off and thedriver’s set temperature will be for the driverand passenger.

In cold weather, the system will start atreduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold airinto the vehicle until warmer air is available.The system will start out blowing air at the floorbut may change modes automatically as thevehicle warms up to maintain the chosentemperature setting. The length of time neededfor warm up will depend on the outsidetemperature and the length of time that haselapsed since the vehicle was last driven.

3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may takefrom 10 to 30 minutes. Then, adjust thetemperature, if necessary.Do not cover the solar sensor located in thecenter of the instrument panel, near thewindshield. For more information on the solarsensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.

4. Press OFF to turn the climate control systemoff. Only the rear defog and heated seats willfunction. Press AUTO or any other buttonexcept the heated seats or rear defog to turnthe climate control system back on.

173

This control has four types of operation.

• Automatic can set/change the temperatureonly. AUTO and temperature only willappear on the display.

• Semi-Automatic Fan can set/change thetemperature and mode. The fan operatesautomatically. The temperature and mode willappear on the display.

• Semi-Automatic Mode can set/change thetemperature and fan speed. The modeoperates automatically. The fan speed andtemperature will appear on the display.

• Manual can set/change the temperature,mode and fan. The fan speed, temperature,and mode will appear on the display.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, theclimate control system will automatically regulatethe inside temperature of your vehicle whenthe remote start system is activated. Normaloperation and the last setting of the climate controlsystem will return after the key is turned on.

Manual OperationDuring daylight hours, the instrument panelbrightness control might need to be adjusted tothe highest setting, in order to see the indicatorlights for the various climate control settings.

OFF: Press this button to turn the climate controlsystem off.

y z (Temperature): Press these buttons tomanually adjust the temperature inside the vehicle.Press the up arrow on the driver or passengerside to raise the temperature, and press the downarrow to lower the temperature. The display willshow the selected temperature.

z9 (Fan): Press this button to decrease the fanspeed. Pressing the arrows cancels the automaticoperation and places the system in manual orsemi-automatic mode. Press the AUTO button toreturn to automatic operation. If the airflow seemslow when the fan is at the highest setting, thepassenger compartment air filter may need to bereplaced. For more information see PassengerCompartment Air Filter on page 178 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 462.

174

9y (Fan): Press this button to increase the fanspeed. Pressing the arrows cancels the automaticoperation and places the system in manual orsemi-automatic mode. Press the AUTO button toreturn to automatic operation. If the airflowseems low when the fan is at the highest setting,the passenger compartment air filter may needto be replaced. For more information seePassenger Compartment Air Filter on page 178and Scheduled Maintenance on page 462.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor, with some air directed to the side windowoutlets and a small amount to the windshield.

) (Bi-Level): This setting directs airflow to theinstrument panel and floor outlets. A small amountof air is also directed to the windshield and theside window outlets.

Y (Vent): This mode directs air through theinstrument panel outlets.

h (Recirculation): Press this button to turnrecirculation mode on or off. This mode keepsoutside air from coming into the vehicle. It can beused to help reduce the outside air and odorsthat enter your vehicle or help cool the air insidethe vehicle quicker.

Recirculation is not available while in the floor,defrost, or floor/defog modes. Using recirculationfor long periods of time may cause the airinside your vehicle to become too dry.Recirculation mode has a five minute timer afterwhich the system allows for some fresh outside airinto the vehicle to maintain interior air quality.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning compressor on and off.The indicator light on the button will come onwhen the air conditioning is on. The indicator lightwill change with each button press even whenconditions prevent operation.

( (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn thedriver or passenger heated seats on and off. SeeHeated Seats on page 10 for additional information.

175

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield. Use the floor/defog mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use defrost to remove fog or frostfrom the windshield more quickly.

- (Floor/Defog): Press this button to direct theair between the windshield, floor outlets andside windows. When you select this mode, thesystem turns recirculation off and runs theair conditioning compressor unless the outsidetemperature is near or below freezing. Pressingthe recirculation button will have no effectother than turning on the indicator light while infloor/defog mode.

1 (Defrost): Press this button to direct most ofthe air to the windshield, with some air directed tothe side windows. In this mode, the system willautomatically turn off the recirculation and run theair conditioning compressor, unless the outsidetemperature is near or below freezing. Pressing therecirculation button will have no effect other thanturning on the indicator light while in defrost mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.

SensorsThe solar sensor on the vehicle monitors the solarheat and the air inside of the vehicle. Thisinformation is used to maintain the selectedtemperature by initiating needed adjustments to thetemperature, the fan speed, and the air deliverysystem. The system may also supply cooler air tothe side of the vehicle facing the sun. Therecirculation mode will also be activated, asnecessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located inthe center of the instrument panel, near thewindshield, or the system will not work properly.

176

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window. Therear window defogger will only work whenthe engine is running.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window defogger on and off.Be sure to clear as much snow from the rearwindow as possible.

The rear window defogger will turn off about20 minutes after the button is pressed. If turnedon again, the defogger will only run for about20 minutes before turning off. The defogger canalso be turned off by pressing the button again orby turning off the engine.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the thumbwheels located between the centeroutlets to open and close the outlets. Move thelever in the center of each air outlet to adjust thedirection of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectorsmay adversely affect the performance ofthe system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

• This vehicle has a passenger compartment airfilter. If the airflow seems low when the fan isat the highest setting it may need to bereplaced. For more information, seePassenger Compartment Air Filter onpage 178.

177

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air filter is located inthe engine compartment below the air inletgrille, near the passenger’s side windshield wiperarm. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 350.

The filter traps most of the pollen from the airentering the air conditioning module. Likethe engine’s air cleaner filter, it needs to bechanged periodically to keep the air conditioningworking at its best. For information on how often tochange the passenger compartment air filter,see Scheduled Maintenance on page 462.

To change the passenger compartment air filter,use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY and turn thewindshield wipers on.

2. Turn the ignition to OFF when the windshieldwipers are in the upright position.

3. Raise the hood.

4. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hosefrom the fender rail and air inlet grille.

5. Peel back the hood weather-strip from thepassenger’s side of the vehicle halfway tothe center of the hood.

6. Remove the three air inlet grille retainers.

7. Remove the air inlet grille.

8. Remove the water deflector panel.9. Remove the old air

filter by pulling upon its tab.

178

10. Install a new passenger compartment air filter.See Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 471 for the type of filter to use.Make sure it slides under the compartmentretainers.

11. Reverse Steps 1 through 8.

For best climate control performance,re-installation of a clean air filter is required.

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on the vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to the warning lights and gages could alsosave you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Asyou will see in the details on the next few pages,some warning lights come on briefly when youstart the engine just to let you know they areworking. If you are familiar with this section, youshould not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to letyou know when there is a problem with yourvehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly – and even dangerous. Soplease get to know the warning lights and gages.They are a big help.

179

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to let the driver know at a glance how the vehicle is running.It will show how fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel is in the fuel tank and many other thingsneeded to drive safely and economically.

180

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speedin both miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

Your vehicle’s odometer works together with thedriver information center. You can set a Trip A andTrip B odometer. See “Trip Information” underDIC Operation and Displays on page 200.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Simply press the odometer/tripswitch on the instrument panel cluster.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometerinstalled, the new one will be set to the correctmileage total of the old odometer.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the engine speed inthousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, achime will come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for severalseconds, then it willflash for several more.

This chime and light will be repeated if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

181

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 75 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The system checkincludes the airbag modules, the wiring and thecrash sensing and diagnostic module. Formore information on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 66.

This light will come onwhen the vehicle isstarted, and it will flashfor a few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.

This means the system is functioning properly.

182

If the airbag readiness light stays on after thevehicle is started, or comes on as the vehicle isbeing driven, there may be an electrical problemand the airbag system may not work properly.Have the vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. Ifthe light does not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system. Thepassenger airbag status indicator on the instrumentpanel will be visible when you turn your ignition keyto RUN or START. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 75 for more information.

The passenger airbagstatus indicator willlight ON and OFF forseveral secondsas a system check.

If you use remote start to start your vehicle from adistance, if your vehicle has this feature, you maynot see the system check. Then, after several moreseconds, the status indicator will light either ON orOFF to let you know the status of the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag.

183

If the word ON is lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. Achild in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF is lit on the airbag status indicator,it means that the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.

184

See Passenger Sensing System on page 75 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 182.

Charging System Light

This light comes onbriefly when the ignitionis turned on, as acheck to show that it isworking. Then itshould go out.

If it stays on, or comes on while the vehicle is beingdriven, a chime will sound and there may be aproblem with the charging system. It could indicatethat the vehicle has a loose accessory belt oranother electrical problem. Have it checked rightaway. Driving while this light is on could drain thebattery and result in the engine suddenly stopping.

If the vehicle must be driven a short distance withthe light on, be certain to turn off all unnecessaryelectrical loads, such as the radio, heater fan,air conditioning fan, and heated seats.

185

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on and the parkingbrake is not applied, there is a brake problem.Have your brake system inspected right away.

This light should comeon briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN.

If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, achime will sound and you should pull off the roadand stop carefully. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may gocloser to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If thelight is still on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 325.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

186

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

Your vehicle may havethe Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS).

This light will come on when your engine isstarted and may stay on for several seconds.That is normal.

If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on,there may be a problem with the anti-lockportion of the brake system. If the brake systemwarning light is not on, you still have brakes,but you do not have anti-lock brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 186.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. If thelight comes on when you are driving, stop assoon as possible and turn the ignition off. Thenstart the engine again to reset the system. Ifthe light still stays on, or comes on again while

you are driving, your vehicle needs service. If theregular brake system warning light is not on,you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lockbrakes. If the regular brake system warning lightis also on, you do not have anti-lock brakesand there is a problem with your regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light on page 186.

The ABS warning light should come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

Your vehicle mayhave a TractionControl System (TCS)warning light.

If this warning light comes on and stays on, theremay be a problem with the TCS and, if yourvehicle has this feature, the StabiliTrak® system.

187

The TCS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition to RUN. If it does not come onthen, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.

If the TCS warning light stays on or comes onwhile you are driving, pull off the road as soon aspossible and stop carefully. Try resetting thesystem by turning the ignition off then back on. Ifthe light still stays on or comes back on againwhile you are driving, your vehicle needs service.Have the traction control system and, if yourvehicle has this feature, the StabiliTrak® systeminspected as soon as possible. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 294 andStabiliTrak® System on page 296 for moreinformation.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

This light tells you thatyour engine is very hot.

This light will come on when you first start thevehicle as a check to let you know that the light isworking. It will go out after a few seconds. If thelight does not come on, the bulb may be burned out.See your dealer to have it corrected.

If the light does not go out or if the light comes onand stays on while you are driving, your vehiclemay have a problem with the cooling system. Youshould stop the vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible to avoid damage to theengine. A warning chime will sound when this lightis on, also.

See Engine Overheating on page 367.

188

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

The vehicle has a gagethat shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the gage pointer moves towards the H, theengine is too hot.

This reading indicates the same thing as thewarning light. It means that the engine coolant hasoverheated. If the vehicle has been operatingunder normal driving conditions, pull off the road,stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible. See Engine Overheating onpage 367.

Low Coolant Warning Light

If your vehicle has thislight, it comes on brieflywhen you turn yourignition on as abulb check only.

189

Tire Pressure Light

This light should comeon briefly as you startthe engine.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. Stopand check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so.If underinflated, inflate them to the properpressure. See Tires on page 402 This light willflash for 60 seconds and then turn on solidif a problem is detected with the Tire PressureMonitor System. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 411.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

190

Notice: If you keep driving your vehiclewith this light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 341.

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

191

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 346.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddleof water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

192

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 343. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

193

Oil Pressure LightYour vehicle may havethis feature.

If the vehicle has an oil problem, this light maystay on after the engine is started, or comeon while you are driving.This light indicates that oil is not going through theengine quickly enough to keep it lubricated. Theengine could be low on oil or could have someother oil problem. Have it fixed right away.The oil light could also come on in the followingsituations:• The light will come on briefly when the ignition

is turned on to show that it is working properly.If it does not come on with the ignition on,there may be a problem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

• Sometimes when the engine is idling at astop, a chime will sound and the light mayblink on and off. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

194

Change Engine Oil LightIf this light comes on, itmeans that service isrequired for yourvehicle.

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 462 andEngine Oil on page 353 for more information.

After having the oil changed you will need to resetthe light. See Engine Oil on page 353 for moreinformation.

If this light is blinking, a chime will sound indicatinglow engine oil.

Security LightFor informationregarding this light,see Theft-DeterrentSystems on page 104.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 154 formore information.

195

Reduced Engine Power Light

If the reduced enginepower light is on, achime will sound and anoticeable reductionin the vehicle’sperformance may occur.

If the reduced engine power light is on, but thereis no reduction in performance, proceed toyour destination. The performance may be reducedthe next time the vehicle is driven. The vehiclemay be driven at a reduced speed while thereduced engine power light is on, but accelerationand speed may be reduced.

Anytime the reduced engine power light stays on,the vehicle should be taken to an authorizedGM dealer as soon as possible for service.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 153.

Headlamps Suggested Light

This light will come onwhen the use ofheadlamps issuggested.

196

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

This light will come onbriefly when the ignitionis on. If the light stayson, a chime willsound indicating yourwindshield washerfluid is low.

See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 380 formore information.

Door Ajar Light

When the ignition is on,this light will stay on untilall doors are closed andcompletely latched.

You will hear a chime if a door is unlatched afterthe engine is started and the vehicle is not inPARK (P).

Trunk Ajar Light

This light will come onand a chime will soundif the trunk is ajar andthe vehicle is not inPARK (P).

Try closing the trunk again. Never drive with thetrunk open.

Service Vehicle Soon Light

Your vehicle may havethis light.

It will come on and a chime will sound if it detectsa problem on the vehicle.

197

Fuel GageThe fuel gage indicatesabout how much fuel isleft in the fuel tankwhen the ignition is on.

When the indicator nears empty, there is still alittle fuel left, but you should get more fuel soon.

Here are four things that some owners askabout. All these things are normal and do notindicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:

• At the gas station, the pump shuts off beforethe gage reads full.

• It takes more, or less, fuel to fill up than thegage reads. For example, the gage readshalf full, but it took more, or less, than half ofthe tank’s capacity to fill it.

• The gage pointer may move while cornering,braking or accelerating.

• The gage may not indicate empty when theignition is turned off.

Low Fuel Warning LightYour vehicle may have a low fuel light. It islocated on the fuel gage and will come on and achime will sound periodically when the vehicleis low on fuel. The light will go off when fuelis added to the fuel tank.

It will also come on for a few seconds when theignition is turned on as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on then, have it fixed.

For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),a LOW FUEL message will appear. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 208 for moreinformation.

198

Check Gas Cap LightYour vehicle may havea check gas cap light.

This light will come on and a chime will sound ifyour gas cap is not securely fastened.

See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 190 andFilling the Tank on page 346 for more information.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle may have a Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

All messages will appear in the DIC displaylocated in the instrument panel cluster, below thespeedometer. The DIC buttons are located onthe center of the instrument panel, belowthe center outlets.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay, the DIC on the uplevel vehicle willdisplay the WELCOME DRIVER (1 or 2) if a

personalized key 1 or 2 is used, and then theinformation that was last displayed beforethe engine was turned off.

The DIC on the base level vehicle displays theodometer and trip odometers only.

The DIC on the uplevel vehicle displays theodometer, trip odometers, fuel economy, tripcomputer, vehicle system, and compass displayinformation. It also displays warning messages if asystem problem is detected. In addition, the DICon the uplevel vehicle displays phone numbersthat are called using the OnStar® system, ifequipped. See OnStar® System on page 126.

The outside air temperature automatically appearsin the bottom right corner of the uplevel DICdisplay when viewing the trip/odometer screens,fuel screens and some of the gages screens. If theoutside air temperature is at or below 37°F(3°C), the temperature reading will toggle betweendisplaying the outside temperature and theword ICE for two minutes. If there is a problemwith the system that controls the temperaturedisplay, the letters OC (open circuit) or SC (shortcircuit) will appear on the display. If this occurs,have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.

199

The DIC on the uplevel vehicle also allows somefeatures to be customized or personalized.See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 229 formore information.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC has different modes which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons located onthe center of the instrument panel. Dependingon whether your vehicle has the base levelor uplevel DIC, the buttons and modes availablewill differ.

The buttons on the base level vehicle are thetrip/odometer and English/Metric buttons.

The buttons on the uplevel vehicle are the trip/odometer, fuel, gages, set/reset, and optionbuttons.

The button functions are detailed in thefollowing pages.

DIC Buttons

TRIP/ODO (Trip/Odometer): Press this button onthe base level vehicle to display the odometerand trip distance.

Press this button on the uplevel vehicle to displaythe odometer, trip distance, time elapsed, andaverage speed.

E/M (English/Metric)**: Press this button on thebase level vehicle to select between Englishor Metric units.

To select between English or Metric units on theuplevel vehicle, see “Units” later in this section.

. (Fuel)*: Press this button to display thefuel range and average fuel economy.

2 (Gages)*: Press this button to display thebattery voltage, oil life, and tire pressure readings.

Uplevel shown

200

r (Set/Reset)*: Press this button to set orreset certain functions and to turn off oracknowledge messages on the DIC.

4 (Option)*: Press this button to display the units,language, personalization, compass zone, andcompass calibration. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 229 and DIC Compass(Uplevel Only) on page 206 for more information.

t (Traction Control)*: If your vehicle hasthe traction control system, press this button toturn traction control on or off. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 294 for more information.

| (Hazard): Press this button to turn thehazard warning flashers on and off. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 150 for moreinformation.

*These buttons are available on uplevelvehicles only.

**This button is available on base levelvehicles only.

Trip/Odometer Menu Items

TRIP/ODO (Trip Odometer): Press this button toscroll through the following menu items:

OdometerPress the trip/odometer button until the odometerdisplays. This mode shows the distance the vehiclehas been driven in either miles or kilometers.

Trip A and Trip BPress the trip/odometer button until A or Bdisplays. This mode shows the current distancetraveled in either miles or kilometers since the lastreset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometerscan be used at the same time.

The display will show the odometer on the top lineand the trip odometer information, either A or B,on the bottom line.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby briefly pressing the set/reset button on theuplevel vehicle or by briefly pressing and holdingthe trip odometer button on the base level vehiclewhile the desired trip odometer is displayed.

201

There is also a retroactive trip odometer functionthat performs the following for each trip odometer:

• If the vehicle’s speed has exceeded 3 mph(5 km/h) during the current ignition cycle, thisfunction will set the trip odometer to thedistance driven during the current ignition cycle.

• If the vehicle’s speed has not exceeded 3 mph(5 km/h), this function will set the trip odometerto the distance driven during the previousignition cycle plus the distance driven duringthe current ignition cycle.

Press and hold the set/reset button on the uplevelvehicle or the trip/odometer button on the baselevel vehicle for three seconds, then releasethe button. The retroactive trip odometer value willbe set into the currently displayed trip odometer.

Time Elapsed (Uplevel Only)Press the trip/odometer button until TIMEELAPSED :00 displays. This mode is like astopwatch, in that you can clock the time it takesto get from one point to another. Each of thefields for the hours, minutes, and seconds aretwo numeric digits.

Once TIME ELAPSED :00 is displayed, press theset/reset button on the uplevel vehicle to startthe timing feature. Press the set/reset button againto stop it. If you will be starting and stoppingyour vehicle, during a trip for instance, the TIMEELAPSED feature will automatically start timingwhere it left off when you last stopped. To reset it,press and hold the set/reset button for about1.5 seconds. The display will return to zero. Pressthe trip/odometer button to exit from the TIMEELAPSED display.

Average Speed (Uplevel Only)Press the trip/odometer button until AVERAGESPEED displays. This mode shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph)or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average iscalculated based on the various vehicle speedrecorded since the last reset of this value. To resetthe value, press the trip/odometer button todisplay AVERAGE SPEED, then press and holdthe set/reset button on the uplevel vehicle.The display will return to zero.

202

Fuel Menu Items (Uplevel Only)

. (Fuel): Press this button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Fuel RangePress the fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.This mode shows the approximate number ofremaining miles or kilometers the vehicle can bedriven without refueling.

Fuel range is based on several factors, includingdistance traveled, fuel used, fuel capacity, etc.This estimate will change if driving conditionschange. For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this mode may readone number, but if the vehicle is driven on afreeway, the number may change even though thesame amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This isbecause different driving conditions producedifferent fuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fuel economy than citydriving. Fuel range cannot be reset.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, FUEL RANGE LOWwill display followed by the LOW FUEL message.See “LOW FUEL” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 208 for more information.

Average Fuel EconomyPress the fuel button until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This mode shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number iscalculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time this menu item wasreset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and holdthe set/reset button. The display will return to zero.

Gages Menu Items (Uplevel Only)2 (Gages): Press this button to scroll throughthe following menu items:

BatteryPress the gages button until BATTERY displays.This mode shows the current battery voltage.Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltagebased on the state of the battery. The batteryvoltage may fluctuate when viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This is normal.If there is a problem with the battery chargingsystem, a DIC message will display. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 208 formore information.See Electric Power Management on page 163 formore information.

203

Tire PressurePress the gages button until FRONT TIREPRESSURE displays. This mode shows thepressure for the front tires. To view the pressurefor the rear tires, press the gages button againuntil REAR TIRE PRESSURE displays. Thetire pressure will be shown in either pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 409 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 208 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashesinstead of a value, there may be a problem withyour vehicle. If this consistently occurs, seeyour dealer for service.

Oil LifePress the gages button until OIL LIFE displays.This mode shows an estimate of the oil’sremaining useful life. If you see OIL LIFE 99% onthe display, that means 99% of the current oillife remains. The engine oil life system will alertyou to change your oil on a schedule consistentwith your driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE OILSOON message will appear on the display. Youshould change your oil as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 353. In addition to the engine oillife system monitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 462 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourselfafter each oil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other than when the oilhas just been changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 356. The display will show 100%when the system is reset.

204

Option Menu Items (Uplevel Only)

4 (Option): Press this button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

UnitsPress the option button until UNITS displays. Thismode allows you to select between English orMetric units of measurement. Once in this mode,press the set/reset button to select betweenENGLISH or METRIC units.

LanguagePress the option button until the language screendisplays. This mode allows you to select thelanguage in which the DIC messages will appear.Once in this mode, press the set/reset buttonto select among the following choices:

• English

• Francais (French)

• Espanol (Spanish)

PersonalizationPress the option button until PERSONALPROGRAM displays. Your vehicle may havepersonalization capabilities that allow youto program certain features to a preferred settingfor up to two drivers.Your vehicle may also have customizationcapabilities that allow you to program certainfeatures to one preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed to one setting onthe vehicle and cannot be programmed to apreferred setting for up to two drivers. See DICVehicle Personalization on page 229 for additionalinformation on personal programming.

Compass ZoneUnder certain circumstances, such as during along distance cross-country trip, it will benecessary to compensate for compass varianceand reset the zone. To change the compass zonethrough the DIC, see DIC Compass (UplevelOnly) on page 206.

Compass CalibrationThe compass can be manually calibrated. Tocalibrate the compass through the DIC, see DICCompass (Uplevel Only) on page 206.

205

DIC Compass (Uplevel Only)Your vehicle may have a compass in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

Compass ZoneUnder certain circumstances, such as during along distance cross-country trip, it will benecessary to compensate for compass varianceand reset the zone through the DIC.

Compass variance is the difference between theearth’s magnetic north and true geographicnorth. If not adjusted to account for compassvariance, the compass in the vehicle could givefalse readings.

In order to do this, the compass must be set orcalibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicleis traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, use the followingprocedure:

Compass Variance Procedure1. Press the option button until COMPASS

ZONE displays.

2. Find the vehicle’s current location andvariance zone number on the map.Zones 1 through 15 are available.

206

3. Press the set/reset button to scroll throughand select the appropriate variance zone.Navigate to one of the trip/fuel menu screensto view the direction the vehicle is moving.This will be shown in the top right corner of theDIC display.

4. If you need to calibrate the compass, use thecompass calibration procedure. See“Compass Calibration Procedure” following.

Compass CalibrationThe compass can be manually calibrated. Onlycalibrate the compass in a safe location wheredriving the vehicle in circles is not a problem.If “CAL” should ever appear in the DIC display,the compass may need calibration.

To calibrate the compass, use the followingprocedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the

compass zone is set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling. See “CompassVariance Procedure” earlier in this section.

2. Press the option button until the COMPASSCALIBRATION screen is displayed.

3. Press the set/reset button to start thecompass calibration.

4. The DIC will display CALIBRATION BEGUNDRIVE IN CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in acircle until the DIC displays CALIBRATIONFINISHED. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION FINISHED for several secondsand then will display the COMPASSCALIBRATION screen.

207

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the uplevel DIC tonotify the driver that the status of the vehicle haschanged and that some action may be neededby the driver to correct the condition. Multiplemessages may appear one after another.

Some messages may not require immediateaction, but you can press any of the DIC buttonson the uplevel vehicle to acknowledge thatyou received the message and clear it from theDIC display.

Some messages cannot be cleared from the DICdisplay because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can becleared.

If there are any active warning messages whenthe vehicle is turned off, two chimes sound and theDIC goes into a reminder mode. The remindermode displays any active message. If thereare multiple messages, the DIC displays eachmessage for five seconds. After each activemessage is displayed once, the reminder modeturns off.

You should take any messages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember that clearingthe messages will only make the messagesdisappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTIONThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 189. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioning compressor isautomatically turned off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You can continue todrive your vehicle.

This message comes on while the ignition is inRUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis warning message and to clear it from thescreen.

208

This message continues to display for two secondsif it has not been acknowledged when the engine isturned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if themessage has been acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when the engine is turned off.

If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on. If this messagecontinues to appear, have the system repaired byyour dealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping beyond areasonable level. The battery saver system startsreducing certain features of the vehicle thatyou may be able to notice. At the point that thefeatures are disabled, this message is displayed.It means that the vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow thebattery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to15.5 volts. If your vehicle has an uplevel DIC, youcan monitor the battery voltage by pressing thegages button until BATTERY displays.

CHANGE OIL SOONThis message displays when service is requiredfor the vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 353 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 462 for more information.

The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset byacknowledging the message. The OIL LIFE screenunder the gages menu on the DIC must also bereset. See “Oil Life” under DIC Operation andDisplays on page 200 and Engine Oil Life Systemon page 356.

This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge thismessage and to clear it from the screen.


If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on.

209

CHARGING SYSTEM FAILUREThis message displays when there is a problemwith the generator and battery charging systems.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. Have the electrical system checked by yourdealer immediately.

This message displays and a chime sounds whilethe ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.



CHECK GAS CAPThis message may display if the fuel cap is noton, or is not fully tightened. The check gascap light also appears on the instrument panelcluster. See Check Gas Cap Light on page 199.Check the fuel cap to ensure that it is on properly.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thismessage off. See Filling the Tank on page 346 formore information.




210

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when the tire pressure inone of the tires needs to be checked. Thismessage also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHTFRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatewhich tire needs to be checked. You can receivemore than one tire pressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that may have beensent at the same time, press the set/reset button.If a tire pressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tirepressures checked and set to those shown on theTire Loading Information label. See Tires onpage 402, Loading Your Vehicle on page 319, andInflation - Tire Pressure on page 409. The DICdisplay also shows the tire pressure values for thefront and rear tires by pressing the gagesbutton. See DIC Operation and Displays onpage 200. If the tire pressure is low, the low tirepressure warning light comes on. See TirePressure Light on page 190.




DELAYED LOCKINGThis message displays to inform the driver thateven though a door lock switch or the lock buttonon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterhas been pressed, that actual locking of the doorsis being delayed because the delayed lockingfeature has been activated in the DIC. See“DELAYED LOCKING” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 229 for more information.

This message appears and a chime soundswhen the ignition is off.

This message cannot be acknowledged.

211

DRIVER’S DOOR AJARThis message displays when the driver’s door isnot closed properly. Make sure that the driver’sdoor is closed completely.

This message displays while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds when the ignition is shiftedout of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.



DRIVER’S REAR DOOR AJARThis message displays when the driver’s side reardoor is not closed properly. Make sure that thedriver’s side rear door is closed completely.

This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted outof PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.



212

ENGINE COOLANT HOTNotice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.Do not increase the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. See Engine Overheatingon page 367 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. The engine coolanttemperature warning light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 188and Engine Coolant Temperature Gage onpage 189 for more information.

To avoid added strain on the engine, turn off theair conditioner if it is on. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditionercan be turned back on.

This message displays only when the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds continuously when thismessage is displayed. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.



HEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDThis message displays when the amount ofavailable light outside of the vehicle is low, or thewindshield wipers have been on for about30 seconds, and the exterior lamps control is offor in the parking lamps position. This messageinforms the driver that turning on the exterior lampsis recommended. See Exterior Lamps onpage 158 for more information.


213



HOOD AJARIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays when the hood is not closedproperly. Make sure that the hood is closedcompletely. See Hood Release on page 349.

This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.



HOT TRANS FLUIDThis message displays when the transaxle fluid inyour vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle andallow it to idle until it cools down. If the warningmessage continues to display, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhile the ignition is in RUN. Press any of theDIC buttons to acknowledge this message and toclear it from the screen.



214

KEY FOB BATTERY LOWThis message displays when the battery in theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs tobe replaced. To replace the battery, see “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 90.




KEY IN IGNITIONThis message displays and a chime soundscontinuously when the driver’s door is open andthe key is in ACCESSORY or OFF.


This message disappears and the chiming stopswhen the key is removed from the ignition.

LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the left front turnsignal bulb needs to be replaced. See Front TurnSignal and Parking Lamps on page 397.




215

LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the left rear turnsignal bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps on page 398.




LOW BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays when the brake fluid levelis low. Have the brake system serviced byyour dealer as soon as possible. See Brakes onpage 381 for proper fluid level.

The brake system warning light also appears onthe instrument panel cluster when this messageappears on the DIC. See Brake System WarningLight on page 186.




LOW FUELThis message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 198 and Filling the Tankon page 346 for more information.

The message displays and a chime sounds whilethe ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.


216

LOW OIL LEVELThis message displays when the vehicle’s engineoil is low. Fill the oil to the proper level as soon aspossible. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 350 for the engine oil fill location. Also, seeEngine Oil on page 353 for information on the kindof oil to use and the proper oil level.

The message displays and a chime sounds whilethe ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.



LOW OIL PRESSURENotice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warningmessage appears on the DIC display, stop thevehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicleuntil the cause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. Severe engine damage can resultfrom driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. SeeEngine Oil on page 353 for more information.This message displays when the vehicle’s engineoil pressure is low. The oil pressure light alsoappears on the instrument panel cluster. See OilPressure Light on page 194.Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damagecan result from driving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealeras soon as possible when this message isdisplayed.This message displays only when the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds continuously when thismessage is displayed.This message cannot be acknowledged andcleared from the screen. This message re-displaysfor a few seconds if the condition still existswhen the engine is turned off.If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on.

217

LOW WASHER FLUIDThis message displays when the windshieldwasher fluid is low. Fill the windshield washerreservoir as soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 350 for thelocation of the windshield washer reservoir. Also,see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 380 formore information.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhen the ignition is in RUN. Press any of theDIC buttons to acknowledge this message and toclear it from the screen.



PARKING BRAKE ONThis message displays to alert the driver when thevehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition is inRUN, and the vehicle speed is greater than5 mph (8 km/h). Release the parking brake beforedriving. See Parking Brake on page 117 formore information.


A chime sounds continuously while this messageis displayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h).Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge thismessage and to clear it from the screen.



218

PARK LAMPS ONThis message displays to alert the driver when theheadlamps or parking lamps are on while theignition is off and the driver’s door is opened. SeeExterior Lamps on page 158 for more information.A chime sounds continuously while this messageis displayed.Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge thismessage and to clear it from the screen.

PASSENGER’S DOOR AJARThis message displays when the front passenger’sdoor is not closed properly. Make sure that thefront passenger’s door is closed completely.This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted out ofPARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons toacknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.This message continues to display for two secondsif it has not been acknowledged when the engine isturned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if themessage has been acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when the engine is turned off.If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on.

PASSENGER’S REAR DOOR AJARThis message displays when the passenger siderear door is not closed properly. Make surethat the passenger side rear door is closedcompletely.




219

REDUCED ENGINE POWERThis message displays when the vehicle’s enginepower is reduced. Reduced engine power canaffect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should be takento your dealer for service as soon as possible.




REDUCED POWER STOP WHEN SAFEThis message displays when your vehicle is inan overheated engine operating mode. Thisoperating mode allows your vehicle to be driven toa safe place in an emergency. In this mode,you will notice a significant loss in power andengine performance. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode on page 370 for moreinformation. Anytime this message is on, thevehicle should be taken to your dealer for serviceas soon as possible.




220

REMOTE START DISABLEDIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays if a remote start attempt isunsuccessful. This may be caused if any of thefollowing conditions are true when a remotestart attempt is made:• The remote start system is disabled through

the DIC.• The key is in the ignition.• The hood or the doors are not closed.• There is an emission control system

malfunction.• The engine coolant temperature is too high.• The oil pressure is low.• The hazard warning flashers are turned on.• The maximum number of remote starts

or remote start attempts between ignitioncycles has been reached.

• The content theft-deterrent alarm is on whileattempting to remote start the vehicle.

See “REMOTE START” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 229 and “Remote VehicleStart” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 90 for moreinformation.

RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the right front turnsignal bulb needs to be replaced. See Front TurnSignal and Parking Lamps on page 397.




221

RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the right rear turnsignal bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps on page 398.




SERVICE ABS SYSTEMIf the vehicle has the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS),this message displays when the system is notfunctioning properly. Have the brake systemserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

The anti-lock brake system warning light alsoappears on the instrument panel cluster when thismessage appears on the DIC. See Anti-LockBrake System Warning Light on page 187.

This message only displays while the ignition is inRUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.



222

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays when a problem with thebrake system has been detected. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer as soon aspossible.





SERVICE PARK LAMPSThis message displays when there is a problemwith the park lamps. Check to see if the park lampfuse is blown and replace the fuse if necessary.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 450 andInstrument Panel Fuse Block on page 450 formore information. If changing the fuse does notcorrect the problem, see your dealer.




223

SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEMIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays if there has been a problem detected withStabiliTrak®. A warning light also appears onthe instrument panel cluster. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Warning Light on page 187. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 296 for moreinformation.If this message turns on while you are driving, pulloff the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.Try resetting the system by turning the ignition offand then back on. If this message still stays on orturns back on again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. Have the StabiliTrak®

System inspected by your dealer as soon aspossible.This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.This message continues to display for two secondsif it has not been acknowledged when the engine isturned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if themessage has been acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when the engine is turned off.If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on.

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the theft-deterrent system programmed in thekey. A fault has been detected in the systemwhich means that the system is disabled and it isnot protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usuallyrestarts; however, you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine.See PASS-Key® III Operation on page 107 formore information.




224

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMThis message displays if a part on the TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any of thefour sensors are missing or inoperable, thewarning comes on in about 10 minutes. A sensorwould be missing, for example, if you putdifferent wheels on your vehicle withouttransferring the sensors. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with theTPM. See your dealer.




SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEMIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays when thesystem is not functioning properly. A warning lightalso appears on the instrument panel cluster.See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Lighton page 187. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 294 for more information. Have theTCS serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.



225

SERVICE VARIABLE EFFORTSTEERINGIf your vehicle has variable effort steering, thismessage displays when if this system is notfunctioning properly. See Steering on page 297 formore information. Have the system serviced byyour dealer as soon as possible.




SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.




STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVEIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays when StabiliTrak® is actively assisting youwith directional control of the vehicle. Slipperyroad conditions may exist when this message isdisplayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.See StabiliTrak® System on page 296.

This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. This message stays on until road conditionschange and StabiliTrak® is not active.

This message cannot be acknowledged andcleared from the screen.

226

STABILITY CONTROL OFFIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays any time the system turns off. When thismessage has been displayed, StabiliTrak® isno longer available to assist you with directionalcontrol of the vehicle. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See StabiliTrak® System on page 296.

This message displays only while the ignition isin RUN.

Any of the following conditions may cause theStabiliTrak® system to turn off:

• The battery is low.

• There is a StabiliTrak® system failure. Seeyour dealer for service.

STARTING DISABLEDThis message displays if the starting of the engineis disabled due to the electronic throttle controlsystem or vehicle theft-deterrent system. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.

This message only appears while the ignition is inRUN and will not disappear until the problem isresolved.


TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVEIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays whenthe system is on. Slippery road conditions mayexist if this message is displayed, so adjustyour driving accordingly. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 294 for more information.

This message only displays while the ignitionis in RUN and will not disappear until drivingconditions change and the TCS is no longer active.

This message cannot be acknowledged orcleared from the screen.

227

TRACTION CONTROL OFFIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays when theTCS turns off. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 294 for more information.

This message only displays while the ignition is inRUN and disappears after two seconds.

Any of the following conditions may cause theTCS to turn off:

• The TCS is turned off by pressing the tractioncontrol button located on the center of theinstrument panel. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 294.

• The battery is low.

• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer forservice.

TRUNK AJARThis message displays when the trunk is notclosed completely. Make sure that the trunk isclosed completely. See Trunk on page 100.




TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays as a reminder to turn offthe turn signal if you drive your vehicle formore than about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turnsignal on. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever onpage 152.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhen the ignition is in RUN. This messageclears from the DIC if the turn signal is manuallyturned off, a turn is completed, or the messageis acknowledged.

228

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle may have customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customization features canonly be programmed to one setting on thevehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferredsetting for two different drivers. The customizationfeatures include the following:

• Exterior lighting delay

• Interior lighting delay

• Delayed locking

• Content theft

• Remote keyless entry feedback

• Remote start

Your vehicle may also have personalizationcapabilities that allow you to program certainfeatures to a preferred setting for up to two drivers.

The first personalized key corresponds todriver 1 and the second personalized keycorresponds to driver 2. The personalizationfeatures include the following:

• Radio station presets

• Auto door unlock preferences

• Remote keyless entry unlock preferences

All of the customization and personalization optionsmay not be available on your vehicle. Only theoptions available will be displayed on your DIC.

The default settings for the customization andpersonalization features were set when yourvehicle left the factory, but may have beenchanged from their default state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

The driver’s personalization preferences arerecalled by using the key programmed fordriver 1 or 2.

To change customization and personalizationpreferences, use the following procedure.

229

Entering the Personal Program Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle

in PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the option button until PERSONALPROGRAM displays.If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), PERSONALPROGRAM ONLY IN PARK will display.If the vehicle is not able to enter the personalprogram menu, PERSONAL PROGRAMNOT AVAILABLE will display.

3. Press the set/reset button to begin.

4. The DIC will then display aninstruction screen.Press the option button to display the featuresthat are available to program.Press the set/reset button to change thesetting of each feature.

Customization Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

FACTORY DEFAULTSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization and personalization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the option button until FACTORY DEFAULTSappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

NO (default): The customization andpersonalization features will not be set to theirfactory default settings.

YES: The customization and personalizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

Select one of the available choices and pressthe option button while it is displayed on the DICto select it and move on to the next feature.

230

ALL KEYS WILL BE RESETThis screen will only display if YES was selectedon the FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.

Press the set/reset button to scroll through thefollowing choices:

CANCEL (default): The features will not be set totheir factory default settings and the DIC willreturn to the PERSONAL PROGRAM menu.

OK: The features will be set to their factory defaultsettings, the DIC will exit the personal programmenu, and PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED willdisplay.

EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAYThis feature allows you to set the amount of timethe exterior lamps remain on after the key isremoved from the ignition or the vehicle isunlocked using the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

Press the option button until EXT LIGHT DELAYappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

15 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for15 seconds.

30 seconds (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.



Select one of the available choices and press theoption button while it is displayed on the DICto select it and move on to the next feature.

231

INT (Interior) LIGHTS KEYS REMOVEDThis feature enables the interior lamps inthe vehicle to turn on for about 25 seconds afterthe key is removed from the ignition.

Press the option button until INT LIGHTS KEYSREMOVED appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to scroll through the followingchoices:

OFF: Removing the key from the ignition will notcause the interior lamps to turn on.

ON (default): Removing the key from the ignitionwill cause the interior lamps to be turned on forabout 25 seconds.


DELAYED LOCKINGThis feature allows the locking of the vehicle to bedelayed until all of the doors have been closedfor about five seconds.

When the delayed locking feature is enabled, itmay be activated when the key is out of theignition by doing one of the following:

• Pressing the driver’s door power lock switchone time while the driver’s door is open.

• Pressing the passenger’s door power lockswitch one time while the passenger’sdoor is open.

• Pressing the lock button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter one time while anydoor is open.

Two chimes will sound to signal that delayedlocking is active.

The doors may be locked immediately by repeatingone of the above actions more than one time.

232

If a door remains open, without any other doorbeing opened or closed, the vehicle will lock afterabout 45 seconds.

If a key is in the ignition, this feature will not lockthe doors. See Delayed Locking on page 97for more information.

Press the option button until DELAYED LOCKINGappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking ofthe vehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doorswill be delayed by five seconds while a dooris open after a power door lock switch is pressed,or the lock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter is pressed while a door is open.


CONTENT THEFTIf your vehicle has the content theft-deterrentsystem, once this feature is turned on, the systemwill activate if someone tries to enter the vehiclewithout using the remote keyless entry transmitteror the correct key.

Press the option button until CONTENT THEFTappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The content theft-deterrent system will beturned off.

ON (default): The content theft-deterrent systemwill be turned on.

When ON is selected, the content theft-deterrentsystem will be armed when the vehicle is locked bypressing the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter or by pressing the powerdoor lock switch. See Content Theft-Deterrent onpage 104 and Power Door Locks on page 97for more information.


233

FOB LOCK FEEDBACKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Press the option button until FOB LOCKFEEDBACK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to scroll through the followingchoices:

OFF: There will be no feedback when locking thevehicle.

LIGHTS: The exterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

LIGHTS and HORN (default): The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lock button on theremote keyless entry transmitter, and the horn willsound when the lock button is pressed againwithin five seconds of the previous command.


REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has remote start, this feature allowsthe remote start to be turned off or on. Theremote start feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside of the vehicle using your remotekeyless entry transmitter. See “Remote VehicleStart” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 90 for more information.

Press the option button until REMOTE STARTappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.


234

Personalization Menu ItemsThe following are personalization features thatallow you to program setting for up to two drivers:

PERSONALIZE KEYThis feature allows you to personalize a key to berecognized as key 1 or 2. A personalized keyallows you to program personalization features toa preferred setting to correspond to key 1 or 2.If you are using a key that has already beenpersonalized, this screen will not display.

Press the option button until PERSONALIZE KEYappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

NO (default): The key will not be personalized.

YES: The key will be personalized.


REPLACE KEYThis screen displays only if YES was selected forthe PERSONALIZE KEY feature, keys 1 and 2have already been personalized, and the currentkey being used is not key 1 or 2. This featureallows you to program a key to be recognized askey 1 or 2 in the event that the previouslyprogrammed key needs to be replaced.

1: The key will be programmed to be recognizedas key 1.

2: The key will be programmed to be recognizedas key 2.

CANCEL (default): The key will not beprogrammed.

RADIO STATIONS PERSONALIZEDThis screen displays only if YES was selected forthe PERSONALIZE KEY feature. This featureallows you to set the radio station presets to berecognized for the key, 1 or 2, that is beingused. You may notice a change to the radio afterthis message displays. After this messagedisplays, any change to the presets will berecognized for key 1 or 2 and will be maintainedby the radio.

235

AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows automatic door unlocking to beturned off, used for the driver’s door only, or forall of the doors.

Press the option button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to scroll through the followingchoices:

OFF: None of the doors will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is takenout of the ignition.

DRIVER: Only the driver’s door will unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the keyis taken out of the ignition.

ALL (default): All of the doors will unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the keyis taken out of the ignition.


AUTO UNLOCK ONThis feature displays only if DRIVER or ALL wasselected for the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK feature.This feature allows the selection of when thevehicle’s doors will unlock.

Press the option button until AUTO UNLOCK ONappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

KEY-OUT: The door(s) will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

PARK (default): The door(s) will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into PARK (P).


236

FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESSThis feature allows the selection of which doorswill unlock on the first press of the unlockbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 90 for more information.

Press the option button until FOB UNLOCK ON1ST PRESS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to scroll through the followingchoices:

DRIVER (default): The driver’s door will unlockon the first press of the unlock button on theremote keyless entry transmitter.

ALL: All of the doors will unlock on the first pressof the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

Select one of the available choices and press theoption button while it is displayed on the DICto select it. The DIC will then display PRESSUNLOCK SWITCH ON KEY FOB. Pressthe unlock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter and your setting will be saved for thatremote keyless entry transmitter.

After programming the last option, the messagePERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED appears on the DICdisplay for a few seconds, then the display returnsto the PERSONAL PROGRAM main screen.

Exiting the Personal Program MenuThe personal program menu will be exited whenany of the following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.

• The end of the personal program menuis reached.

237

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 286. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone, and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.

238

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Notice: The chime signals related to safetybelts, parking brake, and other functions ofyour vehicle operate through the radio/entertainment system. If that equipment isreplaced or additional equipment is added toyour vehicle, the chimes may not work. Makesure that replacement or additional equipmentis compatible with your vehicle before installingit. See Accessories and Modifications onpage 341.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignition isturned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 110 for more information.

Setting the TimePress and hold H until the correct hour appears onthe display. AM or PM will appear on the display(Radio with CD (UpLevel, MP3, and Six-Disc CD)).Press and hold M until the correct minuteappears on the display. The time can be set withthe ignition on or off.

239

Radio with CD (Base)

Playing the Radio

P (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

v (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

DISP (Display): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency, band,and time of day. When the ignition is turned off,press this knob to display the time.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP button until you see the display youwant, then hold this button for two seconds.The radio will produce one beep and the selecteddisplay will now be the default.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The display will show the selection.

e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

o SEEK p: Press and release the right orthe left arrow to go to the next or to the previousstation and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds. SCN will appear onthe display and the radio will produce one beep.The radio will go to a station, play for a fewseconds, then go on to the next station. Presseither arrow again or one of the pushbuttonsto stop scanning presets.

240

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrowfor more than four seconds. PSC will appear on thedisplay and the radio will produce two beeps. Theradio will go to a preset station, play for a fewseconds, then go on to the next preset station.Press either arrow again or one of the pushbuttonsto stop scanning.

The radio will only seek and scan stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep.Whenever that numbered pushbutton ispressed, the station that was set will return forthat pushbutton.

5. Repeat the Steps 2-4 for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

e (Bass/Treble): Push and release this knobuntil BAS or TRE appears on the display. Turn thisknob to increase or to decrease. The display willshow the bass or the treble level. If a stationis weak or noisy, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass and the treble to the middleposition, push and hold the tone knob. The radiowill produce one beep.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the tone knob whenno tone or speaker control is displayed. CEN willappear on the display and you will hear a beep.

241

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, push andrelease this knob until BAL appears on thedisplay. Turn the knob to move the sound towardthe right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the speaker knob untilFAD appears on the display. Turn the knob to movethe sound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middleposition, push the speaker knob, then push it againand hold it until you hear one beep.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the speaker knobwhen no tone or speaker control is displayed. CENwill appear on the display and you will hear a beep.

Radio Messages

CAL (Calibration): The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CALappears on the display it means that the radio hasnot been configured properly for your vehicle and itmust be returned to your dealer for service.

LOC (Locked): This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up theradio. Take your vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress the eject button or the DISP knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player it will stay in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD will start toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

242

When the CD is inserted, CD will appear on thedisplay. As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber will appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 282 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen instead.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

1s (Reverse): Press this button to reversewithin the current track.

2\ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward within the current track.

4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential,order. RND will appear on the display. Press thispushbutton again to turn off random play.

o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current or the previous track. Press theright arrow to go to the start of the next track.

243

To scan tracks, press either arrow for more thantwo seconds until SCN appears on the display.The radio will go to the next track, play for10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Presseither arrow to stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this button to see howlong the current track has been playing. Theelapsed time of the track will appear on thedisplay. To change the default on the display,track, elapsed time, or time of day, pressthis button until you see the display you want,then hold the button for two seconds. The radio willproduce one beep and the selected display willnow be the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remainsafely inside the radio for future listening.

CD: Press this button to play a CD when listeningto the radio. The CD symbol will appear on thedisplay when a CD is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radiooff. CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radiooff if this button is pressed first.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There may have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

244

Radio with CD (Uplevel)

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includessong title and artist name. A service fee isrequired in order to receive the XM™ service.

For more information, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio



DISP (Display): When the ignition is turned off,press this button to display the time.

For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP buttonwhile in XM™ mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP button until you see the display youwant, then hold this button for two seconds.The radio will produce one beep and the selecteddisplay will now be the default.

245

SCV (Speed Compensated Volume): With SCV,the audio system adjusts automatically to makeup for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select SPEED VOL MIN, SPEEDVOL MED, or SPEED VOL MAX. Each highersetting will allow for more volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds. Then as you drive, SCVincreases the volume, as necessary, to overcomenoise at any speed. The volume level shouldalways sound the same to you as you drive. NONEwill appear on the display if the radio cannotdetermine the vehicle speed. To turn SCVoff, press this button until SPEED VOL OFFappears on the display.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay will show the selection.



To scan stations, press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds. SCAN will appear onthe display and the radio will produce one beep.The radio will go to a station, play for a fewseconds, then go on to the next station. Presseither arrow again or one of the pushbuttonsto stop scanning presets.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrowfor more than four seconds. PSCAN will appear onthe display and the radio will produce two beeps.The radio will go to a preset station, play for a fewseconds, then go on to the next preset station.Press either arrow again or one of the pushbuttonsto stop scanning presets.


INFO (Information) (XM™ Satellite RadioService Only): If the current station has amessage, the information symbol will appear onthe display. Press this button to see the message.The message may display the artist, song title,call in phone numbers, etc.

246

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, press and release theINFO button. A new group of words will appearon the display after every press of this button.Once the complete message has been displayed,the information symbol will disappear from thedisplay until another new message is received.The last message can be displayed by pressingthe INFO button. You can view the last messageuntil a new message is received or a differentstation is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station,NO INFO will appear on the display.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.


4. Press EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep.Whenever that numbered pushbutton ispressed, the station that was set will returnand the equalization that was selected will bestored for that pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.


e (Bass/Treble): Push and release this knob untilBASS or TREBLE appears on the display. Turn thisknob to increase or to decrease. The display willshow the bass or the treble level. If a station isweak or noisy, decrease the treble.


To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the tone knobwhen no tone or speaker control is displayed.ALL CENTERED will appear on the display and youwill hear a beep.

247

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectcustomized equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, classical,and custom.

To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,push and release the tone knob until BASS orTREBLE appears on the display.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, push andrelease this knob until BAL appears on thedisplay. Turn the knob to move the sound towardthe right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the speaker knob untilFAD appears on the display. Turn the knob to movethe sound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middleposition, push the speaker knob, then push it againand hold it until you hear one beep.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the speaker knobwhen no tone or speaker control is displayed.ALL CENTERED will appear on the display and youwill hear a beep.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)To select and find a desired category perform thefollowing:

1. Press the CAT button to activate categoryselect mode. The current category willappear on the display.

2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, presseither SEEK arrow to take you to thecategories first station.

4. To go to another station within that categoryand the category is displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow again. If CAT times out and is nolonger on the display, go back to Step 1.

5. Press CAT to exit category select mode orwait for CAT to time out.

If the radio cannot find the desired category,NOT FOUND will appear on the display and theradio will return to the last station you werelistening to.

248

Scanning Categories (CAT)(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)To scan a desired category perform the following:



3. Once the desired category is displayed, presseither SEEK arrow for two seconds to scanthe stations in the category.

4. Press either SEEK arrow again to stopscanning.


Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCALIBRATE appears on the display it means thatthe radio has not been configured properly foryour vehicle and it must be returned to yourGM dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takeyour vehicle to your GM dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your GM dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 278 later in thissection for further detail.



When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appearon the display. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number will appear on the display.

249







1s (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to goto the start of the current track if more thaneight seconds have played. The reverse symboland the track number will appear on the display.If this pushbutton is held or pressed morethan once, the player will continue movingbackward through the CD.

2\ (Fast Forward): Press this pushbutton togo to the next track. The fast forward symbol andthe track number will appear on the display. Ifthis pushbutton is held or pressed more than once,the player will continue moving forward throughthe CD.

250

4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.The random symbol will appear on the display.Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play.

oSEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current or the previous track. Press theright arrow to go to the start of the next track.

To scan tracks, press either arrow for more thantwo seconds until SCAN appears on thedisplay. The radio will go to the next track, play10 seconds, then go on to the next track.

DISP (Display): Press this button to see howlong the current track has been playing. Theelapsed time of the track will appear on thedisplay. To change the default on the display, trackor elapsed time, press this button until you seethe display you want, then hold the button fortwo seconds. The radio will produce one beepand the selected display will now be the default.



EQ (Equalization): Press EQ to select anequalization setting while playing a CD. Theequalization will be set whenever a CD is played.See “EQ” listed previously for more information.If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it willbe activated each time you play a CD.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.Eject may be activated with either the ignition orradio off. CDs may be loaded with the ignition andradio off if this button is pressed first.

251

CD Messages









If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your GM dealer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your GM dealer when reporting theproblem.

Radio with CD (MP3)

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes songtitle and artist name. A service fee is requiredin order to receive the XM™ service.

252

For more information, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM(9696) or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio



DISP (Display): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequencyand time of day. When the ignition is turned off,press this knob to display the time.

For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP (display)button while in XM™ mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the current songor channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP button until you see the display you want,then hold this knob for two seconds. The radio willproduce one beep and the selected display will nowbe the default.


Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH.Each higher setting will allow for more volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then asyou drive, SCV increases the volume, asnecessary, to overcome noise at any speed. Thevolume level should always sound the same to youas you drive. NONE will appear on the display if theradio cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turnSCV off, press this button until OFF appears onthe display.

253

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay will show the selection.



To scan stations, press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds. SCAN will appear onthe display and the radio will produce one beep.The radio will go to a station, play for a fewseconds, then go on to the next station. Presseither arrow again or one of the pushbuttonsto stop scanning presets.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrowfor more than four seconds. PSCAN will appear onthe display and the radio will produce two beeps.The radio will go to a preset station, play for afew seconds, then go on to the next preset station.Press either arrow again or one of the pushbuttonsto stop scanning presets.





254









e (Bass/Treble): Push and release this knob untilBASS or TREBLE appears on the display. Turn thisknob to increase or to decrease. The display willshow the bass or the treble level. If a station isweak or noisy, decrease the treble.


To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the tone knobwhen no tone or speaker control is displayed.ALL CENTERED will appear on the display andyou will hear a beep.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectcustomized equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,classical, and custom.


255



To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the speaker knobuntil FAD (fade) appears on the display. Turn theknob to move the sound toward the front orthe rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middleposition, push the speaker knob, then push itagain and hold it until you hear one beep.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the speaker knobwhen no tone or speaker control is displayed.ALL CENTERED will appear on the display andyou will hear a beep.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)To select and find a desired category perform thefollowing:







256





4. Press either SEEK arrow again to stopscanning.


Radio MessagesCALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCALIBRATE appears on the display it means thatthe radio has not been configured properly foryour vehicle and it must be returned to your dealerfor service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takeyour vehicle to your dealer for service.





When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appearon the display. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number will appear on the display.

257


If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled.There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface of theCD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 282 formore information.







3 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear atrack over again. REPEAT TRACK will appearon the display. The current track will continue torepeat. Press this pushbutton again to turn offrepeat play.

4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RANDOM ON will appear on the display. Press thispushbutton again to turn off random play.

258

o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current or the previous track. Press theright arrow to go to the start of the next track.

To scan tracks, press and hold either arrowfor more than two seconds. SCAN will appear onthe display. The radio will go to the next track,play 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.

DISP (Display): Press this button to see how longthe current track has been playing. The elapsedtime of the track will appear on the display.To change the default on the display, track orelapsed time, press this button until you seethe display you want, then hold the button fortwo seconds. The radio will produce one beepand the selected display will now be the default.





Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playingan MP3 CD-R disc. For more information onhow to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3on page 272 later in this section.

259

CD MessagesCHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to

normal, the CD should play.• You are driving on a very rough road.

When the road becomes smoother, theCD should play.



• The format of the CD may not be compatible.See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

Radio with Six-Disc CD

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes songtitle and artist name. A service fee is requiredin order to receive the XM™ service.

260

For more information, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio



DISP (Display): When the ignition is turned off,press this knob to display the time.

For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knobwhile in XM™ mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP knob until you see the display you want, thenhold this knob for two seconds. The radio willproduce one beep and the selected display willnow be the default.


Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH.Each higher setting will allow for more volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then asyou drive, SCV increases the volume, asnecessary, to overcome noise at any speed.The volume level should always sound the sameto you as you drive. To turn SCV off, pressthis button until OFF appears on the display.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay will show the selection.



261

To scan radio stations, press and hold eitherarrow for more than two seconds. SCANwill appear on the display and the radio willproduce one beep. The radio will go to a station,play for a few seconds, then go on to the nextstation. Press either arrow again or one ofthe pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

To scan the preset stations, press and hold eitherarrow for more than four seconds. PSC willappear on the display and the radio will producetwo beeps. The radio will go to a preset station,play for a few seconds, then go on to thenext preset station. Press either arrow again orone of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only seek and scan stations witha strong signal that are in the selected band.

SCAN: Press this button until SC appears on thedisplay. The radio will go to a station, play fora few seconds, then go on to the next station.Press this button again to stop scanning stations.

The radio will only scan stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.




262









e (Bass/Treble): Push and release this knob untilBASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn thisknob to increase or to decrease. The display willshow the bass or the treble level. If a station isweak or noisy, decrease the treble.


To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the tone knob whenno tone or speaker control is displayed. ALLCENTERED will appear on the display and you willhear a beep.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectcustomized equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, classical,and custom.


263



To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the speaker knobuntil FADE appears on the display. Turn the knobto move the sound toward the front or the rearspeakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middleposition, push the speaker knob, then push itagain and hold it until you hear one beep.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the speaker knobwhen no tone or speaker control is displayed. CENwill appear on the display and you will hear a beep.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)To select and find a desired category performthe following:







264





4. Press either SEEK arrow again tostop scanning.


Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCALIBRATE appears on the display it means thatthe radio has not been configured properly foryour vehicle and it must be returned to yourGM dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takeyour vehicle to your GM dealer for service.



Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it will stay in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD willstart playing where it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

265

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appearon the CD. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number will appear on the display.







266

LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CDplayer. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the rightof the slot, to turn green.

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into theslot, label side up. The player will pull theCD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button fortwo seconds.You will hear a beep and the indicator light,located to the right of the slot, will beginto flash and MULTI LOAD # will appear onthe display.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,INSERT CD # will appear on the display, loada CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player will pull the CD in.

Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light willbegin flashing again. Once the light stopsflashing and turns green, you can load anotherCD. The CD player takes up to six CDs. Donot try to load more than six.

To load more than one CD but less than six,complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loadingCDs, press the LOAD button to cancel the loadingfunction. The radio will begin to play the last CDloaded.If more than one CD has been loaded, a numberfor each CD will appear on the display.

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number will appear onthe display. To play a specific CD, press thenumbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD.A small bar will appear under the CD numberthat is playing and the track number will appear onthe display.


Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).To eject the CD that is currently playing, press andrelease this button.

267

To eject multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the CD eject button fortwo seconds.You will hear a beep and the indicator light,located to the right of the slot, will beginto flash and EJECT ALL will appear onthe display.

2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD #will appear on the display. The CD will ejectand can be removed.Once the CD is removed, the indicator lightwill begin flashing again and another CDwill eject.To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD orthe eject button.

If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, theCD will be automatically pulled back into theplayer. If CD is pushed back into the player, beforethe 25 second time period is complete, theplayer will sense an error and will try to eject theCD several times before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button toeject a CD after you have tried to push it inmanually. The player’s 25-second eject timer willreset at each press of eject, causing the playerto not eject the CD until the 25-second time periodhas elapsed.

s (Reverse): Press this button to reversewithin the current track.

\ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward within the current track.

N (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entireCD can be repeated.

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, pressand release the repeat button. RPT # willappear on the display. Press this button againto turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the repeat button for two seconds.REPEAT CD # will appear on the display.Press this button again to turn off repeat play.

268

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen tothe tracks in random, rather than sequential,order, on one CD or on all of the CDs. To userandom, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listeningto in random order, press and release therandom button. RANDOM ONE will appear onthe display. Press this button again to turnoff random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded in random order, press and hold thisbutton for more than two seconds. Youwill hear a beep and RANDOM ALL will appearon the display. Press this button again toturn off random play.

o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thenext track. If either arrow is held or pressed morethan once, the player will continue movingbackward or forward through the CD.

To scan one CD, press and hold either SEEKarrow for more than two seconds until TRACKSCAN appears on the display and you heara beep. The radio will go to the next track, play for10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Presseither SEEK arrow again, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold eitherSEEK arrow for more than four seconds untilALL CD SCAN appears on the display and youhear a beep. Use this feature to listen to10 seconds of the first track of each loaded CD.Press either SEEK arrow again, to stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to see howlong the current track has been playing. Theelapsed time of the track will appear on thedisplay. To change the default on the display, trackor elapsed time, press this knob until you seethe display you want, then hold the knob fortwo seconds. The radio will produce one beep andthe selected display will now be the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s)will remain safely inside the radio for futurelistening.

269



Using List ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature calledsong list. This feature is capable of saving 20 trackselections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at leastone CD. See “LOAD” listed previously in thissection for more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not insong list mode. LIST should not appear onthe display. If LIST is present, press the LISTbutton to turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use the SEEKright arrow to locate the track to be saved.The track will begin to play.

4. Press and hold the LIST button to save thetrack into memory. When LIST is pressed,one beep will be heard immediately. Aftertwo seconds of continuously pressing the LISTbutton, TRACK ADD will appear on thedisplay and two beeps will sound to confirmthe track has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you tryto save more than 20 selections.

To play the song list, press the LIST button.One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear onthe display. The recorded tracks will begin toplay in the order they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEKarrows. Seeking past the last saved trackwill return to the first saved track.

270

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the LIST button to turn song list on.LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press either SEEK arrow to select the desiredtrack to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the LIST button fortwo seconds. When LIST is pressed,one beep will be heard immediately. Aftertwo seconds of continuously pressing the LISTbutton, TRACK DELETE will appear on thedisplay and two beeps will be heard to confirmthat the track has been deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track will beadded to the end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the LIST button to turn song list on.LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press and hold the LIST button for more thanfour seconds. One beep will be heard,followed by two beeps after two seconds, anda final beep will be heard after four seconds.LIST EMPTY will appear on the displayindicating the song list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list containssaved tracks from that CD, those tracks areautomatically deleted from the song list. Any trackssaved to the song list again are added to thebottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the LIST button.One beep will be heard and LIST will be removedfrom the display.

271

CD Messages









If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your GM dealer when reporting theproblem.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a

CD-R disc.• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on

one disc.• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl

extension, other file extensions may not work.• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or

variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum will be available for display by theradio when recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning anMP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usuallybetter to burn the disc all at once.

272

The player will be able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files. Long file names, folder names,or playlist names may use more disc memoryspace than necessary. To conserve space on thedisc, minimize the length of the file, folder orplaylist name. You can also play an MP3 CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The systemcan support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in orderto keep down the complexity and confusionin trying to locate a particular folder duringplayback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files the player will let you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items over themaximum will be ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory will be treated as a folder. If theroot directory has compressed audio files, thedirectory will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All filescontained directly under the root directory willbe accessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) will always be accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player will advance to thenext folder in the file structure that containscompressed audio files and the empty folder willnot be displayed or numbered.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, thefiles will be located under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functions will haveno function on a CD that was recorded withoutfolders or playlists. When displaying the name ofthe folder the radio will display ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files willbe located under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons will search playlists (Px)first and then go to the root folder. When the radiodisplays the name of the folder the radio willdisplay ROOT.

273

Order of PlayTracks will be played in the following order:

• Play will begin from the first track in the firstplaylist and will continue sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last track ofthe last playlist has been played, play willcontinue from the first track of the first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, thenplay will begin from the first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks from the rootdirectory have been played, play will continuefrom files according to their numerical listing.After playing the last track from the last folder,play will begin again at the first track of the firstfolder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display will notautomatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as thedefault display. See DISP later in this section formore information. The new track name will appearon the display.

File System and NamingThe song name that will be displayed will be thesong name that is contained in the ID3 tag. Ifthe song name is not present in the ID3 tag, thenthe radio will display the file name without theextension (such as .mp3) as the track name.Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages will be shortened. The display will notshow parts of words on the last page of text and theextension of the filename will not be displayed.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsYou can access preprogrammed playlists whichwere created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™,or Real Jukebox™ software, however, you will nothave editing capability. These playlists will betreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in, and READING DISC will appearon the display. The CD should begin playing andthe CD symbol will appear on the display. If youwant to insert a CD with the ignition off, first pressthe eject button or the DISP knob.

274










275

3 N (Repeat): With repeat, one track, the entirefolder, or playlist can be repeated.

Press and release this pushbutton until REPEATTRACK, REPEAT FOLDER, or REPEATP-LIST appears on the display. The current track,folder or playlist will continue to repeat. Pressand release this pushbutton until REPEAT OFFappears on the display to turn off repeated play.

4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton tohear tracks in random, rather than sequentialorder. You can random the entire folder, playlist,or CD.

Press and release this pushbutton until RANDOMFOLDER, RANDOM P-LIST (play list), orRANDOM DISC appears on the display. Once allof the tracks in the current folder or playlisthave been played the system will move on to thenext folder or playlist and play all of the tracksin random order.

When in random, pressing and releasing eitherSEEK arrow will take you to the next or previousrandom track.

Press and release this pushbutton untilRANDOM OFF appears on the display, toturn off random play.

5 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbuttonto go to the first track in the previous folder.Pressing this button while in folder random modewill take you to the previous folder and randomthe tracks in that folder.

6 # (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to goto the first track in the next folder. Pressing thisbutton while in folder random mode will take you tothe next folder and random the tracks in that folder.

o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the previous track. Press the right arrow togo to the start of the next track.

To scan tracks, press either arrow for more thantwo seconds until SCAN appears on thedisplay. The radio will go to the next track, play10 seconds, then go on to the next track.

276

DISP (Display): Press this button to switchbetween track mode, folder/playlist mode, and ID3tag. The display will show only eight characters,but there can be up to four pages of text. Ifthere are more than eight characters in the song,folder, or playlist name, pressing this knobwithin two seconds will take you to the next pageof text. If there are no other pages to be shown,pressing this button within two seconds willtake you to the next display mode.

• Song name and time of day mode will displaythe current song name and time of day.

• Folder/playlist mode will display the currentfolder or playlist number the track numberand the elapsed time of the track.

• Song name and track number modewill display the current song name andtrack number.

• ID3 Tag and folder mode will display the ID3tag information and the folder number.

• Song and folder mode will display the numberof songs in the folder and the folder number.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP knob until you see the display you want, thenhold this knob for two seconds. The radio willproduce one beep and the selected display willnow be the default.

INFO (Information): INFO will appear on thedisplay whenever a current track has ID3tag information. Press this button to display theartist name and album contained in the tag.





277

XM Radio MessagesIf you have a radio with CD (MP3), or a radio with a Six-Disc CD, you will receive these radio messages.

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The radio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune toanother channel.

CH Unavail Channel nolonger available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

278

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having your vehicle serviced,check with your GM dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight-digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

279

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operate andLOC or LOCKED will appear on the display.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel ControlsIf your vehicle has thisfeature, some audiocontrols can be adjustedat the steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

xw (Seek): Press the up or the down arrow togo to the next or to the previous radio stationand stay there. The radio will only seek stationswith a strong signal that are in the selected band.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrowfor two seconds until you hear a beep. The radiowill go to a station, play for a few seconds,then go on to the next station. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track.

280

> (Mute/OnStar®): Press this button to silencethe system. Press this button again, or anyother radio button, to turn the sound on.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold thisbutton for more than two seconds to interactwith the OnStar® system. See the OnStar® Systemon page 126 in this manual for more information.

BAND: Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).

1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button toplay stations that are programmed on theradio preset pushbuttons. The radio will only seekpreset stations with a strong signal that are inthe selected band.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to go to the next availableCD, if multiple CDs are loaded.

+ / − x (Volume): Press the plus or minus buttonto increase or to decrease the volume.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet.If there is interference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations will boost the power levels duringthe day, and then reduce these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing thetreble on your radio.

281

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio may display NO SIGNAL to indicateinterference.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

282

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rearwindow defogger, located in the rear window.Make sure that the inside surface of the rearwindow is not scratched and that the lines on theglass are not damaged. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere with radio reception.Also, for proper radio reception, the antennaconnector at the top-center of the rear windowneeds to be properly attached to the post on theglass.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damagecaused to your backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will not be coveredby your warranty.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window may damagethe rear window antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Do not clear theinside rear window with sharp objects.

Because this antenna is built into your rearwindow, there is a reduced risk of damage causedby car washes and vandals.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, it could mean thata defogger grid line has been damaged. If thisis true, the grid line must be repaired.

If you choose to add a cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attachedto the glass, make sure that you do not damagethe grid lines for the AM-FM antenna. Thereis enough space between the lines to attach acellular telephone antenna without interfering withradio reception.

283

XM™ Satellite RadioAntenna SystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chimelevel. To change the volume level of the chime,press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignitionon and the radio power off. The volume levelwill change from the normal level to loud,and LOUD will appear on the radio display.To change back to the default or normal setting,press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volumelevel will change from the loud level to normal,and NORMAL will appear on the radio display.Removing the radio and not replacing it witha factory radio or chime module will disablevehicle chimes.

284

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 286Defensive Driving ...................................... 286Drunken Driving ........................................ 287Control of a Vehicle .................................. 290Braking ...................................................... 290Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 291Braking in Emergencies ............................. 293Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 294Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .............. 295StabiliTrak® System ................................... 296Steering .................................................... 297Off-Road Recovery .................................... 300Passing ..................................................... 300Loss of Control .......................................... 302Driving at Night ......................................... 303Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 305

City Driving ............................................... 308Freeway Driving ........................................ 309Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 310Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 311Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 312Winter Driving ........................................... 314If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 318Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 319Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 319

Towing ........................................................ 325Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 325Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 326Towing a Trailer ........................................ 327

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

285

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 16.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready.



Rear-end collisions are about the mostpreventable of accidents. Yet they arecommon. Allow enough followingdistance. Defensive driving requires that adriver concentrate on the driving task.Anything that distracts from the drivingtask makes proper defensive driving moredifficult and can even cause a collision,with resulting injury. Ask a passenger tohelp do these things, or pull off the roadin a safe place to do them. These simpledefensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

286

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half theadult population — choose never to drink alcohol,so they never drive after drinking. For personsunder 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state to

drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent.

287

The person would reach the same BAC by drinkingthree 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or threemixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. Aperson who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body water thanmen. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higherBAC level than a man of her same body weight willwhen each has the same number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.

288

A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or numberof cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful”is not the right answer. What if there is anemergency, a need to take sudden action, as whena child darts into the street? A person with even amoderate BAC might not be able to react quicklyenough to avoid the collision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you are with a group, designatea driver who will not drink.

289

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 294.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 341.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 186.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time tocool between hard stops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster if you do a lot of heavy braking.

290

If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realisticfollowing distances, you will eliminate a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better brakingand longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light on theinstrument panel willcome on brieflywhen you start yourvehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin todrive away, your ABS will check itself. You mayhear a momentary motor or clicking noisewhile this test is going on, and you may evennotice that your brake pedal moves or pulses alittle. This is normal.

291

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmed tomake the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

292

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.Your wheels can stop rolling.

Once they do, the vehicle cannot respond to yoursteering. Momentum will carry it in whateverdirection it was headed when the wheels stoppedrolling. That could be off the road, into the verything you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want tosqueeze the brakes hard without locking thewheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding, easeoff the brake pedal. This will help you retainsteering control. If you do have ABS, it is different.See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 291.

In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

293

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System(TCS) that limits wheel spin. This is especiallyuseful in slippery road conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that one or both of thefront wheels are spinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens, the system works thefront brakes and reduces engine power to limitwheel spin. It may also upshift the transaxle to limitwheel spin. You may feel or hear the systemworking, but this is normal.

The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message onthe Driver Information Center (DIC) will bedisplayed when the system is limiting wheel spin.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the TCSbegins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. When road conditionsallow safe use of the cruise control, it can be usedagain. See Cruise Control on page 154.

The TCS operates in all transaxle shift leverpositions. But the system can upshift the transaxleonly as high as the shift lever position that waschosen, so use the lower gears only whennecessary. See Automatic Transaxle Operationon page 114.

This light, along with theTRACTION CONTROLOFF message, willdisplay on the DIC forthree seconds when theTCS is not on.

If there is a problem with the system, theSERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message will alsocome on in the DIC. When this warning light ison, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjustdriving accordingly.

294

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the TCS on.But you can turn the system off if you everneed to. The TCS should be turned off if thevehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow androcking the vehicle is required. See RockingYour Vehicle to Get It Out on page 319 and If YourVehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 318.

To turn the TCS on or off, press the TCS buttonlocated above the radio.

When the TCS is turned off, the TCS warning lightwill come on along with the TRACTION CONTROLOFF message on the DIC. It will disappear whenthe TCS is turned back on. If the TCS is limitingwheel spin when the TCS button is pressed, theTCS warning light will come on and the TCS willturn off right away.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 341 for more information.

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)Your vehicle may have an Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery road conditions. Thesystem operates only if it senses that one orboth of the front wheels are spinning or beginningto lose traction. When this happens, the systemreduces engine power and may also upshiftthe transaxle to limit wheel spin. You may feel orhear the system working, but this is normal.

The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message onthe Driver Information Center (DIC) will bedisplayed when the system is limiting wheel spin.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when ETSbegins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. When road conditionsallow safe use of it, the cruise control can be usedagain. See Cruise Control on page 154.

295

The ETS operates in all transaxle shift leverpositions. But the system can upshift the transaxleonly as high as the chosen shift lever position,so use the lower gears only when necessary. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 114.

This light, along with theTRACTION CONTROLOFF message, willdisplay on the DIC forthree seconds when theETS is not on.

If there is a problem with the system, theSERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message will alsocome on in the DIC. When this warning light ison, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the ETS on.But you can turn the system off if you everneed to. The ETS should be turned off if thevehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow androcking the vehicle is required.

To turn the ETS on or off, press the ETS buttonlocated above the radio.

When the ETS is turned off, the ETS warning lightwill come on along with the TRACTIONCONTROL OFF message on the DIC. It willdisappear when the ETS is turned back on. If theETS is limiting wheel spin when the tractioncontrol button is pressed, the ETS warning lightwill come on and the ETS will turn off right away.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with a vehiclestability enhancement system called StabiliTrak®.It is an advanced computer controlled systemthat assists you with directional control ofthe vehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak® activates when the computer sensesa discrepancy between your intended pathand the direction the vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak® selectively applies braking pressureat any one of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer thevehicle in the direction which you are steering.

296

When the system activates, a STABILITYCONTROL ACTIVE message will be displayed onthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICWarnings and Messages on page 208. You mayalso hear a noise or feel vibration in the brakepedal. This is normal. Continue to steer the vehiclein the direction you want it to go.

If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, aSERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM or STABILITYCONTROL OFF message will be displayed on theDriver Information Center (DIC). A warning lightwill also appear on the instrument panel cluster.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 208.When this message is displayed, the system is notoperational. Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when theStabiliTrak® activates, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you may reengagethe cruise control. See Cruise Control onpage 154 for more information.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

297

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 294.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


298

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot; there is not room. Thatis the time for evasive action — steering aroundthe problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 290. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

299

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the same laneas oncoming traffic for several seconds. Amiscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

300

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

301

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If you have the Traction Control System (TCS),remember: It helps avoid only the accelerationskid. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 294. If you do not have this system, or if thesystem is off, then an acceleration skid is alsobest handled by easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

302

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. Ifyou do not have ABS, then in a braking skid,where the wheels are no longer rolling, releaseenough pressure on the brakes to get the wheelsrolling again. This restores steering control.Push the brake pedal down steadily when youhave to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels arerolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

303

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

304

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. Ona wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, orturn as well because your tire-to-road traction isnot as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires donot have much tread left, you will get even lesstraction. It is always wise to go slower andbe cautious if rain starts to fall while you aredriving. The surface may get wet suddenly whenyour reflexes are tuned for driving on drypavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Evenif your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

305

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brakepedal lightly until your brakes worknormally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

306

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through your engine’s air intake andbadly damage your engine. Never drive throughwater that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through themvery slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried



away. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 402.

307

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 309.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

308

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads. Butthey have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

309

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. Ifyou must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealerships all across North America. Theywill be ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

310

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

311

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

312

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

313

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 402.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

314

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), itimproves your ability to accelerate when drivingon a slippery road. Even though your vehicle hasTCS, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to the road conditions. Under certainconditions, you may want to turn the TCS off,such as when driving through deep snowand loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motionat lower speeds. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 294.

315

Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too. Ifyou do have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) on page 291. ABS improves your vehicle’sstability when you make a hard stop on aslippery road. Whether you have ABS or not, youwill want to begin stopping sooner than youwould on dry pavement. Without ABS, if you feelyour vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakesa little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to getthe most traction you can.

Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will justslide. Brake so your wheels always keep rollingand you can still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear.

If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brakebefore you are on it. Try not to brake whileyou are actually on the ice, and avoid suddensteering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

316

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.

317

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransaxle or other parts of the vehicle canoverheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 319.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 424.

318

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels. Ifyour vehicle has traction control, you shouldturn the traction control system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 294. Thenshift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and aforward gear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out. Ifyour vehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 325.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it may properly carry, theTire and Loading Information label and theVehicle Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

319

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).

The Tire and Loading Information label lists thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds. The vehicle capacity weight includesthe weight of all occupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.

The Tire and Loading Information label also lists thetire size of the original equipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). Formore information on tires and inflation, see Tires onpage 402 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 409.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Label Example

320

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 327 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

321

Item Description Total

AMaximum VehicleCapacity Weight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

322



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’smaximum vehicle capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door.

Example 3

323

The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load,spread it out. See “Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If things like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else are put inside the vehicle, they willgo as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

324

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 484.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

325

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behinda motorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as dinghytowing, towing your vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground, and dolly towing, towing your vehiclewith two wheels on the ground and two wheels upon a device known as a dolly.

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you will want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 310.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do nottow your vehicle with all four wheels on theground.

The vehicle was not designed to be towed with allfour wheels on the ground. If your vehicle mustbe towed, you should use a dolly. See “DollyTowing” that follows for more information.

326

Dolly Towing

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To towyour vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the gear shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove theignition key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

5. Release the parking brake.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured. Youmay also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if you havefollowed all the steps in this section. Askyour dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withthe proper trailer towing equipment. To identifythe trailering capacity of your vehicle, readthe information in “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section. Trailering is differentthan just driving the vehicle by itself.

327

Trailering means changes in handling,acceleration, braking, durability, and fueleconomy. Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That is the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assembly, and tires are forced towork harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operate atrelatively higher speeds and under greater loads,generating extra heat. What is more, the traileradds considerably to wind resistance, increasingthe pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerHere are some important points:

• There are many different laws, includingspeed limit restrictions, having to do withtrailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, notonly where you live but also where you willbe driving. A good source for this informationcan be state or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. Ask a hitchdealer about sway controls.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) the vehicle is driven.The engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatthe vehicle tows a trailer, do not drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and other partsof the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Do not drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on thevehicle’s parts.

328

There are three important considerations have todo with weight:

• The weight of the trailer

• The weight of the trailer tongue

• The total weight on the vehicle’s tires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs(450 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much the vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that is on the vehicle,and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle cancarry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo must be subtracted from the maximumtrailer weight.

Ask your dealer for our trailering information oradvice, or you can write us at:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

329

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of the vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo in it, and the people who will beriding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle,it will reduce the tongue weight the vehiclecan carry, which will also reduce the trailer weightthe vehicle can tow. And if you tow a trailer,you must add the tongue load to the GVWbecause the vehicle will be carrying that weight,too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 319for more information about the vehicle’s maximumload capacity.

When using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailertongue (A) should weigh 10 percent to 15 percentof the total loaded trailer weight (B).

After the trailer is loaded, weigh the trailer and thetongue, separately, to see if the weights areproper. The correct weight could be achievedsimply by moving some items around in the trailer.

330

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire-Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 319. Be sure not to goover the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR,including the weight of the trailer tongue. If aweight distribution hitch is used, make sure not togo over the rear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why the right hitchis needed. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intendedfor hitches. Do not attach rental hitches orother bumper-type hitches to it. Use onlya frame-mounted hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

• If holes need to be made in the body of thevehicle to install a trailer hitch, then be sureto seal the holes later when the hitch isremoved. If the holes are not sealed, deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from the exhaustcan get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhauston page 122. Dirt and water can, too.

Safety ChainsChains should always be attached between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross the safety chainsunder the tongue of the trailer so that the tonguewill not drop to the road if it becomes separatedfrom the hitch. Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitch manufacturer or bythe trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’srecommendation for attaching safety chainsand do not attach them to the bumper. Alwaysleave just enough slack so the rig can be turned.And, never allow safety chains to drag on theground.

331

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure toread and follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.

• If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not tryto tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If youdo, both brake systems won’t work well, orat all.

• Even if your vehicle doesn’t have anti-lockbrakes, don’t tap into your vehicle’s brakesystem if the trailer’s brake system willuse more than 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluidfrom your vehicle’s master cylinder. If itdoes, both braking systems won’t work well.You could even lose your brakes.

• Will the trailer brake parts take 3,000 psi(20 650 kPa) of pressure? If not, thetrailer brake system must not be used withyour vehicle.

• If everything checks out this far, then makethe brake fluid tap at the upper rear mastercylinder port. But don’t use copper tubingfor this. If you do, it will bend and break off.Use steel brake tubing.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,get to know the rig. Acquaint yourself with thefeel of handling and braking with the added weightof the trailer. And always keep in mind that thevehicle is now a good deal longer and not nearlyas responsive as the vehicle is by itself.

Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires, and mirror adjustment. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start the vehicle andtrailer moving and then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check the electricalconnection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

332

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas when driving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help avoid situations that require heavybraking and sudden turns.

PassingMore passing distance is needed up ahead whentowing a trailer. And, because the vehicle is agood deal longer with the trailer, you will need togo much farther beyond the vehicle you havepassed before you can return to the proper lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,move that hand to the left. To move the trailer tothe right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making TurnsNotice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turns whiletrailering.

When turning with a trailer, make wider turns thannormal. Do this so the trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or otherobjects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signalwell in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen towing a trailer, the vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.Check with your dealer. The arrows on theinstrument panel will flash whenever signaling aturn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps will also flash, telling other drivers you areabout to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on thetrailer are burned out. You may think drivers behindyou are seeing your signal when they are not. It isimportant to check occasionally to be sure thetrailer bulbs are still working.

333

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforestarting down a long hill or steep downgrade. If thevehicle is not shifted down, the brakes mighthave to be used so much that they would get hotand no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce thevehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) toreduce the possibility of engine and transaxleoverheating.

If towing a trailer, you may want to drive inTHIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D). Shift to a lowergear as needed.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if the rig ever has to be parked on a hill, hereis how to do it:

1. Apply the regular brakes, but do not shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under thetrailer’s wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply theparking brake, and shift to PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

334

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply the regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• Start the engine.

• Shift into a gear.

• Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingThe vehicle will need service more often when itpulls a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 462 for more information. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid; which should not beoverfilled; engine oil, drive belt(s), and cooling andbrake systems. Each of these is covered in thismanual, and the Index will help you find themquickly. If trailering, it is a good idea to review thisinformation before starting on a trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingThe cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 367.

335

✍ NOTES

336

Service ........................................................ 340Accessories and Modifications ................... 341California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 341Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 342Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ...................................... 343Fuel ............................................................. 343

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 343Gasoline Specifications .............................. 344California Fuel ........................................... 344Additives ................................................... 344Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 345Filling the Tank ......................................... 346Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 348

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 348Hood Release ........................................... 349Engine Compartment Overview .................. 350Engine Oil ................................................. 353Engine Oil Life System .............................. 356Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 358Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 360

Engine Coolant .......................................... 363Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 367Engine Overheating ................................... 367Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ..................................... 370Cooling System ......................................... 370Power Steering Fluid ................................. 378Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 380Brakes ...................................................... 381Battery ...................................................... 384Jump Starting ............................................ 385

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 391Bulb Replacement ....................................... 394

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 394Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ........... 395Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ....... 397Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .............. 398License Plate Lamp ................................... 400Replacement Bulbs ................................... 400

Windshield Replacement ............................ 401

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

337

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 401Tires ............................................................ 402

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 403Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 406Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 409Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 411Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 416When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 417Buying New Tires ...................................... 418Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 420Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 421Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 422Wheel Replacement .................................. 422Tire Chains ............................................... 424If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 425Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 426Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 427Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 429Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 435Compact Spare Tire .................................. 437

Appearance Care ........................................ 438Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 438Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 440Leather ...................................................... 441Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 441Care of Safety Belts .................................. 442Weatherstrips ............................................ 442Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 442Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 443Finish Care ............................................... 443Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 444Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 444Tires ......................................................... 445Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 445Finish Damage .......................................... 446Underbody Maintenance ............................ 446Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 446Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 447


338

Vehicle Identification .................................. 448Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 448Service Parts Identification Label ............... 448

Electrical System ........................................ 449Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 449Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 449Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 449

Power Windows and Other PowerOptions .................................................. 450

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 450Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 450Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 452

Capacities and Specifications .................... 454


339

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants youto be happy with it. We hope you will go to yourdealer for all your service needs. You will getgenuine GM parts and GM-trained and supportedservice people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

340

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not coveredby warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complementand function with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,many parts and systems (including some insidethe vehicle), many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or emit thesechemicals.

341

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 495.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 80.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 473.

342

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep your engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, GM recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

The 8th digit of your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) shows the code letter or numberthat identifies your engine. You will find the VINat the top left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 448.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 3.8L V6 engine (VINCode 2), use regular unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octanerating is less than 87, you may notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VINCode 7), use regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 or higher. For bestperformance or trailer towing, you may choose touse middle grade 89 octane unleaded gasoline.If the octane rating is less than 87, you maynotice an audible knocking noise when you drive,commonly referred to as spark knock. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If you are usinggasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and youhear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.

343

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 344 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label.If this fuel is not available in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, your vehicle willoperate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 190. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis.

If it is determined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may not becovered by your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolinesmay be available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.

344

However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

345

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring init; if the cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

346

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned.Fuel can spray out on you if you openthe fuel cap too quickly. This spray canhappen if your tank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather. Open the fuelcap slowly and wait for any hiss noise tostop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 442.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 190.

Your vehicle may also have a check gas capwarning light, which will be displayed on theinstrument panel cluster if the fuel cap is notproperly installed. See Check Gas Cap Lighton page 199 for more information.If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), the CHECK GAS CAP message willbe displayed if the fuel cap is not properlyinstalled. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 208 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling,do not remove the nozzle. Shut off theflow of fuel by shutting off the pump orby notifying the station attendant. Leavethe area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get one foryou. If you get the wrong type, it may not fitproperly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 190.

347

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

348

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the interior hoodrelease handle withthis symbol on it.It is located to theleft of the steeringcolumn below theinstrument panel.

2. Push the secondary hood release lever,located under the center of the hoodabove the grille, up and to the right todisengage it.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, make sure all the fillercaps are properly secured. Pull the hood downand close it firmly.

349

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine, this is what you will see:

350

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 380.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 384.C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 385.D. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse

Block on page 452.E. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See

Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 178.F. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling

System on page 370.G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power

Steering Fluid on page 378.H. Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap

on page 367.

I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 353.

J. Electric Engine Cooling Fans. See CoolingSystem on page 370.

K. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 353.

L. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 360.

M. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 381.

N. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 358.

351

When you open the hood on the 3.8L V6 engine, this is what you will see:

352

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 380.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 384.C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 385.D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See

Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 178.E. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood

Fuse Block on page 452.F. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling

System on page 370.G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure

Cap on page 367.H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).

See Power Steering Fluid on page 378.I. Electric Engine Cooling Fans. See Cooling

System on page 370.J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 353.K. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine

Oil” under Engine Oil on page 353.L. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See

“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 360.

M. Engine Coolant Bleed Valve. See “How to AddCoolant to the Radiator” under CoolingSystem on page 370.

N. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 381.

O. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 358.

Engine OilChecking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 350for the location of the engine oil dipstick.1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several

minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

353

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at thetip of the dipstick, you will need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use theright kind. This section explains what kind ofoil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specifications on page 454.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 350 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range inthe cross-hatched area. Push the dipstick allthe way back in when you are through.

3.6L V6 Engine

3.8L V6 Engine

354

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

355

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need forgood performance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A change engine oil light or, ifyour vehicle has the Driver Information Center(DIC), a CHANGE OIL SOON message will comeon. See Change Engine Oil Light on page 195or DIC Warnings and Messages on page 208.Change the oil as soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if youare driving under the best conditions, the oillife system may not indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However, the engineoil and filter must be changed at least once ayear and at this time the system must be reset.Your dealer has GM-trained service peoplewho will perform this work using genuine GM partsand reset the system. It is also important tocheck your oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sincethe last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

356

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime the oil is changed, reset the systemso it can calculate when the next oil change isrequired. If a situation occurs where you change theoil prior to a change engine oil light or CHANGE OILSOON message being turned on, reset the system.After changing the engine oil, reset the system byperforming the following steps:

• Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC)1. Press the option button on the DIC until

ENGINE OIL MONITOR appears on theDIC screen.

2. Press the set/reset button to reset thesystem. The next screen indicates thatthe CHANGE OIL SOON messagehas been reset.

If the vehicle has the uplevel DIC, whenthe gages button is pressed and theOIL LIFE REMAINING mode appears,it should read 100 percent OIL LIFEREMAINING.

3. Turn the key to OFF.

• Vehicles without Driver InformationCenter (DIC)1. With the engine off, turn the ignition

key to RUN.2. Fully press and release the accelerator

pedal slowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Turn the key to OFF, then start thevehicle.

If the light or message comes back on whenyou start your vehicle, the oil life system has notreset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

357

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a localrecycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is located in theengine compartment on the driver’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 350 for more information on location.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 462 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

3.6L V6 Engine shown, 3.8L V6 Engine similar

358

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filterdo the following:

1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engineair cleaner/filter housing.

2. Push the filter cover housing toward theengine.

3. Pull out the filter.

4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.See Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 471.

5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabsthrough the slots on the housing. A notchon the sides of the filter cover will indicatethe correct engagement.

6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housingto lock the cover in place.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not thereand the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

359

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check the automatic transaxle fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listedin Additional Required Services on page 464,and be sure to use the transaxle fluid listedin Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 470.

How to Check AutomaticTransaxle FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

360

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures areabove 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should beat normal operating temperature, which is180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place theshift lever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear, pausing forabout three seconds in each one. Then,position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

The transaxle fluiddipstick handle hasthis symbol on it,and is located nearthe rear of the enginecompartment.

361

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 350for more information on location.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three secondsand then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and readthe lower level. The fluid level must be inthe crosshatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way.

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 470.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatchedarea on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 470.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained,push the dipstick back in all the way.

362

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolantis designed to remain in the vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whicheveroccurs first, if only DEX-COOL® extended lifecoolant is added.

The following explains the cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If there isa problem with engine overheating or if coolantneeds to be added to the radiator, see EngineOverheating on page 367.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® engine coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at the firstmaintenance service after each 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)coolant in your vehicle.

363

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® engine coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If this coolant mixtureis used, nothing else needs to be added.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If coolant needs to be added more than four timesa year, have your dealer check the coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listedin this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 470 for more information.

364

Checking Coolant

The coolant recoverytank is located in theengine compartmenttoward the rear ofthe engine on thepassenger’s side of thevehicle. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 350 for moreinformation on location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface whenchecking the coolant level.

When the engine is cold, the coolant levelshould be at the cold fill line or a little higher.The cold fill line is near the bottom of therecovery tank and has an arrow pointingdown at it.

3.8L V6 Engine shown,3.6L V6 Engine

similar

365

Adding CoolantIf more coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty,add coolant to the radiator. See EngineOverheating on page 367.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost neverhave to add coolant at the radiator. Neverturn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — when the engine and radiatorare hot.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Cooling System on page 370.

366

Radiator Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

The radiator pressure cap is located in the frontof the engine compartment on the passenger’sside of the vehicle. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 350 for more informationon location.

Engine OverheatingThere is a coolant temperature gage and awarning light on the instrument panel cluster thatindicate an overheated engine condition. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 189and Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lighton page 188 for more information.

In addition, if your vehicle is equipped with aDriver Information Center (DIC), you will find anENGINE COOLANT HOT and a REDUCEDPOWER STOP WHEN SAFE message displayedon the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 208 for more information.

367

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood.Stay away from the engine if you see orhear steam coming from it. Turn it off andget everyone away from the vehicle untilit cools down. Wait until there is no signof steam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.



See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 370 forinformation on driving to a safe place inan emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 370 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

368

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning, but seeor hear no steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the engine can get alittle too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Set the climate controls to the highest heatsetting and fan speed and open the windowsas necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down. Also, see “Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode” later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

369

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode allows yourvehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergencysituation. If an overheated engine condition exists,an overheat protection mode which alternates firinggroups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.In this mode, you will notice a significant loss inpower and engine performance. The REDUCEDPOWER STOP WHEN SAFE message will comeon in the Driver Information Center (DIC), if thevehicle has one, along with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on the instrument panel,to indicate the vehicle has entered overheatedengine protection operating mode. The temperaturegage will also indicate an overheat condition exists.Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailerin the overheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil willbe severely degraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil and reset theoil life system. See Engine Oil on page 353.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, this iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Radiator Pressure CapC. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

3.8L V6 Engine

370

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Pressure CapC. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

3.6L V6 Engine

371

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at or above the cold fill line on the coolantrecovery tank. If it is not, there may be a leak at thepressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in thecooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, the fansshould be running. If the fans are not running,the vehicle needs service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 370 for informationon driving to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

372

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery Tank

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

If you have not found a problem yet, but thecoolant level is not at the cold fill line, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolantrecovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 363for more information.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolantand the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant level in the coolant recoverytank is at the cold fill line, start the vehicle.

373

If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. You can add the propercoolant mixture directly to the cooling systemthrough the coolant fill neck under the pressure cap,but be sure the system is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burn youbadly. They are under pressure, and if youturn the radiator pressure cap — even alittle — they can come out at high speed.Never turn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the radiator pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling systemand radiator pressure cap to cool if youever have to turn the pressure cap.

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator(3.8L V6 Engine)

Notice: Your engine has a specific radiatorfill procedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

1. You can remove theradiator pressurecap when thecooling system,including the radiatorpressure cap andupper radiator hose,is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseuntil it first stops. Do not press down whileturning the pressure cap. If you hear ahiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left.

374

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but nowpush down as you turn it. Remove thepressure cap.

3. Open the coolant airbleed valve locatedon the thermostathousing, near theupper radiator hose.

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 350 for more information on location.

4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 363 formore information about the proper coolantmixture.If you see a stream of coolant coming from theair bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise,close the valve after the radiator is filled.

5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from theengine and the compartment.

6. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to thecold fill line.

375

7. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

8. Start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fans.

9. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of the filler neck.

10. Then replace the radiator pressure cap.At any time during this procedure if coolantbegins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstallthe pressure cap. Be sure the pressure capis hand-tight and fully seated.

11. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. Thelevel in the coolant recovery tank should beat the cold fill line when the engine is cold.

376

How to Add Coolant to the CoolingSystem (3.6L V6 Engine)Notice: Your engine has a specific coolingsystem drain and fill procedure. Failureto follow this procedure could cause yourengine to overheat and be severely damaged.If your engine’s cooling system needs tobe drained and re-filled, please see your dealer.

1. You can remove thepressure cap whenthe cooling system,including thepressure cap andupper radiator hoseis no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans that there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap andremove it.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

3. Fill the cooling system with the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture, up to the baseof the filler neck. See Engine Coolant onpage 363 for more information aboutthe proper coolant mixture.

4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from theengine and the compartment.

377

5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to thecold fill line.

6. Reinstall the coolant recovery tank cap andthe pressure cap.

7. If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantlylow, you should have your dealership servicedepartment inspect the vehicle for leaks.

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 350 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leakin the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

378

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick witha clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

If your vehicle has the 3.8L V6 engine, the fluidlevel should be between the ADD and HOT markswhen the engine is cold, and at the HOT markwhen the engine is hot. If the fluid is at theADD mark when the engine is cold or hot, powersteering fluid should be added.

If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine, the fluidlevel should be between the Min (Minimum)and Max (Maximum) marks when the engine iscold, and at the Max mark when the engine is hot.If the fluid is at the Min mark when the engineis cold or hot, power steering fluid should beadded.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 470.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

379

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer FluidWhen the windshield washer fluid is low, a lowwasher fluid light may appear on the instrumentpanel cluster. See Low Washer Fluid WarningLight on page 197 for more information.

In addition, if your vehicle has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the LOW WASHER FLUIDmessage will display when the fluid level is low.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 208for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 350for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

380

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 350 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well,or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then youwill have too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work is done onthe brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid,it can spill on the engine. The fluid willburn if the engine is hot enough. You orothers could be burned, and your vehiclecould be damaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 186.

381

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 470.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 442.

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

382

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality GM brake parts. When you replaceparts of your braking system — for example, whenyour brake linings wear down and you need newones put in — be sure you get new approvedGM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakesmay no longer work properly. For example, ifsomeone puts in brake linings that are wrong foryour vehicle, the balance between your frontand rear brakes can change — for the worse.The braking performance you have come to expectcan change in many other ways if someone putsin the wrong replacement brake parts.

383

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 350 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

If the battery has a very low charge or is dead,you may not be able to remove the ignitionkey from the ignition switch or shift out ofPARK (P). Refer to Shifting Out of Park (P)on page 120.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 385 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

384

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a

12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper

cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do not want.You would not be able to start your vehicle, andthe bad grounding could damage the electricalsystems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Put anautomatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manualtransaxle in NEUTRAL before setting theparking brake.

385

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets. Turn off the radio and all lampsthat are not needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle andlocate the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on that vehicle.You will not use your vehicle’s battery for jumpstarting. It has a remote positive (+) jumpstarting terminal, located on the underhoodfuse block, for that purpose. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 350 for moreinformation on location.

To uncover the remotepositive (+) terminal,press the tab atthe bottom of the fuseblock and lift thecover up.

Always use the remote positive (+) terminalinstead of the positive (+) terminal on the battery.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

3.8L V6 Engine shown,3.6L V6 Engine

similar

386

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.



Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

387

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative willgo to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Notice: If you connect a negative cable to theEngine Control Module (ECM), ECM mountingbracket or any cables that attach to theECM bracket, you may damage the ECM.Attach the negative cable to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part, other than the ECM, ECMbracket or cables attached to the ECM bracket.

Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), oryou will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal location on the vehiclewith the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

3.8L V6 Engine shown, 3.6L V6 Engine similar

388

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal location onthe vehicle with the good battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal location on thevehicle with the good battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anythinguntil the next step. The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (–)terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away fromthe dead battery, but not near engineparts that move. The electrical connectionis just as good there, and the chance ofsparks getting back to the battery ismuch less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

389

Notice: If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables do not toucheach other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

Jumper Cable Removal

390

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the fuse block cover to its originalposition.

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aimingsystem. The aim has been preset at the factoryand should need no further adjustment

However, If the vehicle is damaged in an accident,the headlamp aim may be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams atyou, this may also mean the vertical aim needs tobe adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to yourdealer for service if the headlamps need to bere-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aimthe headlamps as described in the followingprocedure.

The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:

• The vehicle should be placed so the headlampsare 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on aperfectly level surface which is level all the wayto the wall.

• The vehicle should be placed so it isperpendicular to the wall.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice ormud on it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and allother work stopped while headlamp aiming isbeing done.

• The vehicle should be normally loaded with afull tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs(75 kg) on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

391

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’slow-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlampswill be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlampsare aimed properly.

The vertical headlamp aiming screws are locatedunder the hood near the headlamps.

The adjustment screw can be turned with a6 mm male hex.

To adjust the vertical aim on the headlamps,do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 349 for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of thelow-beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from the ground tothe aim dot on the low-beam headlamp.Record the distance.

392

4. At the wall measure from the groundupward (A) to the recorded distancefrom Step 3 and mark it.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improvebeam cut-off when aiming. Covering aheadlamp may cause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to the headlamp.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wallthe width of the vehicle at the height of themark in Step 4.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place apiece of cardboard or equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being adjusted. Do not placedirectly on the headlamp. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlamp beingadjusted to be seen on the flat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,which are under the hood near each headlampassembly.The adjustment screw can be turned with a6 mm male hex.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until theheadlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tapeline. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise toraise or lower the angle of the beam.

393

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp ispositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A) showsthe correct headlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the oppositeheadlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 400.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed inthis section, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

394

Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps

A. Sidemarker LampB. Low-Beam HeadlampC. High-Beam Headlamp

Low-Beam Headlamp andSidemarker BulbsTo replace a low-beam headlamp or sidemarkerbulb, do the following:


2. Remove the fastener from the front fascia.The fastener is located inboard of theheadlamp assembly, near the high-beamheadlamp.

395

3. Pull up on the plastic retaining clip (C) whilepushing rearward on the headlamp. Align thesquare cut-out on the retaining clip withthe notch on the headlamp.

4. Remove the screw (A) from the metalheadlamp retainer to pull up and release theheadlamp assembly.

5. Remove the push pin (B) retaining the frontfascia.

6. Pull forward on the front fascia and then pullthe headlamp assembly out from the vehicle.Moving the headlamp up and down slightlymay help with its removal.You may have someone assist you withthis step.

7. Remove the access cover from behind thebulb being replaced.

8. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn toremove it from the headlamp assembly.

9. Holding the base of the socket, pull the oldbulb from the socket.

10. Replace with a new bulb.

11. Reverse all the steps to reassemble theheadlamp assembly.When replacing the plastic retaining clip,push down on it while pushing rearward onthe headlamp, making sure the headlampassembly is secure.

396

High-Beam Headlamp BulbsTo replace the high-beam headlamp bulb, do thefollowing:


2. Locate the high-beam headlamp bulb socket.

3. Remove the access cover from behind thebulb being replaced.

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull it from the headlamp assembly.


6. Replace with a new bulb.

7. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 to reinstall.

Front Turn Signal and ParkingLampsTo replace a front turn signal/parking lamp bulb inthe front fascia, do the following:

1. Locate the front turn signal/parking bulbsocket by reaching behind the front bumper.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull it out of the assembly.


4. Push the new bulb into the socket.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.

397

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,Stoplamps and Back-up LampsTo replace a taillamp, turn signal, sidemarker,stoplamp or back-up lamp bulb, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 100for more information.

2. Remove the convenience net if the vehiclehas one.

3. Remove the four plastic wing nuts retainingthe trunk trim. There are two wing nutslocated on the driver’s side (shown) andtwo located on the passenger’s side of thevehicle.

4. Pull back the trunk trim.

398

5. Remove the two wing nuts holding thetaillamp assembly in place.

6. Pull out the taillamp assembly and disconnectthe wiring harness.

A. TaillampB. Back-upC. Taillamp

D. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal

E. Sidemarker

7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it.

8. Replace with a new bulb.9. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall.

10. Reverse these steps to reinstall thetaillamp assembly.

399

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:1. Remove the two screws holding each of

the license plate lamps to the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the

license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamps Bulb Number

Back-Up Lamps 921

Fog Lamp H11

Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps 3157NAK

Headlamps

High-Beam H9

Low-Beam H11

Front/Rear Sidemarker,License Plate Lamp,and Taillamp

194

Stoplamps and Taillamps 3057

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

400

Windshield ReplacementYour vehicle is equipped with an acousticwindshield. If you ever have to have yourwindshield replaced be sure to get an acousticwindshield so you will continue to have thebenefits an acoustic windshield can provide.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 462 for more information on wiper bladeinspection.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For the proper typeand length, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 471. Here is how to remove thewiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector awayfrom the windshield.

2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip upfrom the blade connecting point, and pull theblade assembly down toward the windshieldto remove it from the wiper arm.

3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper armand snap the clip into place.

401

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 319.

• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.



Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 409.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, orif your vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

402

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

403

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 421.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 437 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 425.

Compact Spare Tire Example

404

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 409.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standardsset by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

405

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as highas it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. Theletter R means radial ply construction; the letter Dmeans diagonal or bias ply construction; and theletter B means belted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission/transaxle, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

406

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 409.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 319.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 319.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 319.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

407

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 319.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 409 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 319.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 417.

408

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 421.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 319.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tireand Loading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 319.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

409

A Tire and Loading Information label is attachedto the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). Thislabel shows your vehicle’s original equipment tiresand the correct inflation pressures for your tireswhen they are cold. The recommended coldtire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and Loading Information label,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 319. How youload your vehicle affects vehicle handling andride comfort. Never load your vehicle with moreweight than it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 437.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

410

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. TPMS sensors are mounted onto eachtire and wheel assembly, except for the spare tire.The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure inyour vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressurewarning light, located in the instrument panelcluster. If your vehicle has the uplevel DriverInformation Center (DIC), a warning message tocheck the pressure in a specific tire displays atthe same time the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on. The low tire pressure warning lightand the DIC warning message CHECK TIREPRESSURE come on at each ignition cycleuntil the tires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure. Vehicles that have theuplevel DIC buttons can also check tirepressure levels by pressing the gages button.

For additional information and details about theDIC operation and displays see DIC Operation andDisplays on page 200 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 208.

During cooler weather conditions, the low tirepressure warning light and the DIC warningmessage, if your vehicle has this feature, maycome on when the vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. This could be anearly indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s)are getting low and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflatedto the inflation pressure recommended by thevehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tiresof a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

411

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tiresis significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheatand can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

412

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

A tire and Loading Information label, attached toyour vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 319,for an example of the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 409.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn youabout a low tire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tire maintenance. SeeTire Inspection and Rotation on page 416 andTires on page 402.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

The TPMS will not function properly if one or moreof the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable.When the system detects a missing or inoperablesensor, an error message SERVICE TIREMONITOR SYSTEM appears on the DIC display,if your vehicle has this feature. If you havereplaced a tire/wheel assembly without transferringthe TPMS sensors, the error message displays.Once you re-install the TPMS sensors, theerror message should go off. See your dealer forservice if all TPMS sensors are installed andthe error message comes on and stays on.

413

TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires, theidentification codes need to be matched to thenew tire/wheel position. The sensors are matched,to the tire/wheel positions, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tireusing a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealerfor service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’spressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You have two minutes to match each tire andwheel position. If it takes longer than two minutesto match any tire and wheel position, thematching process stops and you need tostart over.

The TPMS matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with theengine off.

3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttonsat the same time for approximatelyfive seconds. The horn sounds twice tosignal the receiver is in relearn mode and theTPMS sensor matching process can begin.

4. Start with the driver side front tire.

5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valvestem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s air pressure for10 seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds.The horn chirp, which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirms that the sensoridentification code has been matched to thetire/wheel position. To decrease the tire’sair-pressure use the pointed end of the valvecap, a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.

414

6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for thedriver side rear tire, the horn chirps two moretimes to signal the tire learning processhas ended. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

10. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the tire andloading information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:



The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:




415

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 417and Wheel Replacement on page 422 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 462.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 454.

416

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 426.

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

417

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 403 for additional information.

418

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 437.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information label. Thislabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 319,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

419

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a differentsize than your original equipment wheels andtires, this may affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance torollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, tractioncontrol, and electronic stability control, theperformance of these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 418 andAccessories and Modifications on page 341 foradditional information.

420

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

421

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,or excessive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

422

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 426 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

423

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P225/55R17 size tires,do not use tire chains, there is notenough clearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension orother vehicle parts. The area damaged bythe tire chains could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle and you or othersmay be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommendsit for use on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions.Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.



To help avoid damage to your vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or remove thedevice if it is contacting your vehicle,and do not spin your wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size otherthan P225/55R17 size tires, use tire chains onlywhere legal and only when you must. Use onlySAE Class “S” type chains that are the propersize for your tires. Install them on the front tiresand tighten them as tightly as possible with theends securely fastened. Drive slowly and followthe chain manufacturer’s instructions. If youcan hear the chains contacting your vehicle,stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Driving toofast or spinning the wheels with chains on willdamage your vehicle.

424

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how touse the jacking equipment to change a flattire safely.

425

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 150 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remainin the vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

426

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is located in the trunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 100 formore information.

2. Remove the convenience net if the vehiclehas one.

3. Lift the handle on the spare tire cover. Thehandle may hook on the front edge of thetrunk’s weatherstrip to hold the cover out ofthe way.

427

4. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise andremove it.

5. Remove the compact spare tire.

6. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwiseand remove it. Then remove the jack andwrench.

428

The tools you will need to change a tire includethe jack (A), extension and protection guide (B),and wheel wrench (C).

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireYou vehicle may have wheels with exposed wheelnuts. If so, go to the Removing the Wheel Nutssection. If the vehicle has steel wheel covers withcenter caps, the wheel nuts are hidden behind thecap. To remove the wheel cover, do the following:

1. Remove the center cap by using the flat endof the wheel wrench at the notch on the cap.

Removing the Center Cap

429

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen the plasticwheel nut caps, if the vehicle has them, in acounterclockwise direction.If needed, finish loosening them by hand.The nut caps will not come off of the wheelcover.

3. Use the flat end of the wheel wrench and pryalong the edge of the cover until it comes off.Pull off the wheel cover and set it aside.The edge of the wheel cover could be sharp,so do not try to remove the cover with yourbare hands. Do not drop the cap or lay it facedown, as it could become scratched ordamaged.

If the vehicle has aluminum wheels and wheelcenter caps, the wheel nuts are hidden behind thecenter cap. Remove the center cap by usingthe flat end of the wheel wrench at the notch.

Do not drop the cap or lay it facedown, as it couldbecome scratched or damaged.

Once you have removed the wheel cover orcenter cap, use the following procedure to removethe flat tire and install the spare tire.

1. Place the wheel wrench securely overthe wheel nut. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen all the wheelnuts, but do no remove them yet.

2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raisethe jack lift head.

Removing the Wheel Nuts

430

3. Find the jacking location using the diagramabove and corresponding triangular-shapedhoisting notches located on the undersideof the vehicle’s plastic molding.The front location is about 6.5 inches (16.5 cm)from the rear edge of the front wheel well.The rear location is about 9 inches (22.8 cm)from the front edge of the rear wheel well.

4. Put the compact spare tire near you.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

431

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground for the compact spare tire tofit under the vehicle.

6. Remove all wheelnuts and take offthe flat tire.

432

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth ora paper towel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper or wire brush later, ifneeded, to get all the rust or dirt off.

7. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces, andspare wheel.

8. Install the compact spare tire.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the roundedend of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighteneach nut by hand until the wheel is heldagainst the hub.

433

10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 454for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 454 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

434

11. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put the wheel cover on the compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel coverin the trunk until you have the flat tire repairedor replaced.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

After the compact spare tire has been installed onthe vehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.

When storing a full-size tire, use the extensionwith the protector, located in the foam holder, tohelp avoid wheel surface damage.

435

To store a full-size tire, do the following:

1. Install the tools in their original location inthe trunk area and secure.

2. Place the tire valve stem facing down andthe protector/guide placed through a wheelbolt hole.

3. Remove the protector and attach the retainersecurely.

4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.

When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk,put the protector back in the foam holder.

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tireon page 437. Use the following as a guidefor storing the compact spare tire and tools.

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Compact Spare TireD. Wing NutE. JackF. Wheel WrenchG. Extension ProtectorH. Foam HolderI. Bolt Screw

Compact Spare Tire

436

A. RetainerB. Full-Size Flat TireC. Protective GuideD. Extension Bolt ScrewE. Wing NutF. JackG. Wheel WrenchH. Protective GuideI. Foam HolderJ. Bolt Screw

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. The compactspare is made to perform well at speeds up to65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace thespare with a full-size tire as soon as possible.The spare tire will last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

Full-Size Flat Tire

437

And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheelwith other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not usetire chains on your compact spare.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremesof heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require morefrequent cleaning. Use care because newspapersand garments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the integrated radio antenna and the rearwindow defogger. When cleaning the glass onyour vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

438

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

439

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until no more canbe removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil andgently rub toward the center. Continuecleaning, using a clean area of the clotheach time it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area untilthe cleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed,a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

440

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a clean soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can be used to gentlyremove dust and dirt. Never use spot liftersor removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercialcleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect soft plastic surfaces may permanentlychange the appearance and feel of your interiorand are not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

441

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 470.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.Approved cleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 447. Do not use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based, or that contain acid orabrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushedpromptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, orthey could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

442

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 442.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 447.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and madefor a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

443

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

444

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped withaluminum or chrome-plated wheels throughan automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

445

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratchesin the finish should be repaired right away.Bare metal will corrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

446

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover Polish

Removes swirl marks,fine scratches, andother light surfacecontamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleansand lightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

447

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label in the trunk. It is very helpfulif you ever need to order parts. On this label,you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

448

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 80.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by a circuitbreaker in the underhood fuse block. An electricaloverload will cause the headlamps to go onand off, or in some cases to remain off. If thishappens, have the headlamp system checkedright away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, have it fixed.

449

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse blockprotect the power windows and other poweraccessories. When the current load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes, protectingthe circuit until the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and in the fuse block wiring itself.This greatly reduces the chance of fires causedby electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Make sure a bad fuse is replaced with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The instrument panelfuse block is located onthe passenger’s sideof the instrument panel.Pull off the coverlabeled FUSES toexpose the fuse block.

450

Fuses UsageDR/LCKTRUNK Door Locks, Trunk

RFA/MOD Remote Keyless EntryPRK/SWTCH Ignition Key Lock

CLSTR ClusterSTR/WHL/

ILLUMSteering Wheel ControlsIllumination

ONSTAR/ALDL OnStar®, Data Link

Fuses UsageINT/ILLUM Interior LampsPWR/SEAT Power Seat

S/ROOF SunroofCNSTR Canister VentHVAC Climate Control System

HAZRD Turn Signal, HazardPRK/LAMP Park Lamps

CHMSL/BKUP Center-High-MountedStoplamp/Back-up Lamps

PWR/MIR Power MirrorsCRUISE Cruise Control

RDO/AMP Radio, AmplifierHTD/SEAT Heated SeatsHTD/MIR Heated Mirrors

PWR/WNDW Power Window

Relays UsageRAP Retained Accessory Power

PRK/LAMP Park Lamp RelayR/DEFOG Rear Defogger Relay

451

Underhood Fuse BlockSome fuses and relays are located in theunderhood fuse block on the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle in the engine compartment. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 350 formore information on location.

Mini-Fuses Usage1 Driver’s Side High-Beam2 Passenger’s Side High-Beam3 Driver’s Side Low-Beam

Mini-Fuses Usage4 Passenger’s Side Low-Beam5 Windshield Wiper6 Washer/Regulated Voltage Control7 Fog Lamps8 Transaxle Control Module9 Supplemental Inflatable Restraint

10 Auxiliary Power11 Horn12 Emission13 Air Conditioner Clutch14 Oxygen Sensor15 Powertrain Control Module

16 Powertrain Control Module,Electronic Throttle Control

17 Electronic Throttle Control18 Display19 Anti-lock Brake Solenoid20 Fuel Injector21 Transaxle Solenoid22 Fuel Pump23 Anti-lock Brake System24 Ignition

452

J-Style Fuses Usage25 Air Pump26 Battery Main 127 Battery Main 228 Battery Main 329 Fan 130 Battery Main 431 Anti-lock Brake System Motor32 Fan 233 Starter

Micro-Relays Usage34 Headlamp High-Beam35 Headlamp Driver Module36 Fog Lamp37 Ignition 138 Air Conditioning Compressor39 Horn40 Powertrain41 Fuel Pump

Mini-Relays Usage42 Fan 143 Fan 3

Mini-Relays Usage44 Windshield Wiper High45 Windshield Wiper46 Fan 248 Crank

Spare Fuses Usage49 Spare50 Spare51 Spare52 Blank53 Blank54 Blank

Fuse Puller Usage55 Fuse Puller

Diodes Usage

§ Air Conditioner Compressor ClutchDiode

453

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for more information.Automatic Transaxle (Drain and Refill) 7.4 qt 7.0 LCooling System Including Reservoir

3.6L V6 and 3.8L V6 11.2 qt 10.6 LEngine Oil with Filter

3.6L V6 5.5 qt 5.2 L3.8L V6 4.5 qt 4.3 L

Fuel Tank3.8L Engine (with NU6 emissions) sold new in CA, ME,VT, NY, MA (see your dealer for bordering states) 17.0 gal 64.4 L

3.8L Engine (without NU6 emissions) sold new in allother states (see your dealer for more information) 17.5 gal 66.2 L

3.6L Engines sold new in all states 17.5 gal 66.2 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 462

454

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap3.6L V6 7 Automatic 0.044 inches (1.1 mm)3.8L V6 2 Automatic 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)

455

✍ NOTES

456

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 458Introduction ............................................... 458Maintenance Requirements ........................ 458Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 459Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 459Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 462Additional Required Services ..................... 464Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 465

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 466At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 467At Least Once a Month ............................. 467At Least Once a Year ............................... 468Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 470Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 471Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 472Maintenance Record .................................. 473

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

457

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary to keepyour vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance may not be covered by warranty.

458

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

459

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourGM Goodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 319.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 343.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 462 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 464 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 465 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work.

460

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should haveyour GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 495.

Owner Checks and Services on page 466 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 470 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 471.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

461

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the change engine oil light or CHANGE OILSOON DIC message comes on, it means thatservice is required for your vehicle. Haveyour vehicle serviced as soon as possible withinthe next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, ifyou are driving under the best conditions, theengine oil life system may not indicate that vehicleservice is necessary for over a year. However,the engine oil and filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time the system mustbe reset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer hasGM-trained service technicians who will performthis work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 356 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the light or message appears, certainservices, checks, and inspections are required.Required services are described in the followingfor “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that the first servicebe Maintenance I, the second service beMaintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the lightor message comes on within 10 months sincethe vehicle was purchased or Maintenance IIwas performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the lightor message comes on 10 months or more sincethe last service or if the light or message hasnot come on at all for one year.

462

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 353. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 356. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 358. See footnote (l). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 416 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 467.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluidas needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

463

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 358. • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter(severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter(normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service. See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt. AnEmission Control Service. See footnote (m). •

464

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate allhinges and latches, including those for thebody doors, hood, secondary latch, pivots, springanchor, release pawl, rear compartment, glovebox door, and console door. More frequentlubrication may be required when exposed to acorrosive environment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

465

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter ifthe vehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or

delivery service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 363 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) Check throttle system for interference orbinding and for damaged or missing parts. Replaceparts as needed. Replace any components thathave high effort or excessive wear. Do notlubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you withthese checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 470.

466

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 353 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 363 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correct pressures.Do not forget to check the spare tire. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 409. Check tomake sure the spare tire is stored securely.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 426.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 416.

467

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 117.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 117.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

468

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

469

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 353.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 363.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, inCanada 89021186).

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 109435474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).

470

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourGM dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® PartNumber

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15221217 A1614C

Engine Oil Filter

3.6L V6 89017342 PF61

3.8L V6 25010792 PF47

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 15284938 CF132

Spark Plugs

3.6L V6 Engine 12597464 41-990

3.8L V6 Engine 12568387 41-101

Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly – 22.0 inches (55.0 cm)

Driver’s Side 15146564 —

Passenger’s Side 15146565 —

471

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.8L V6 Engine

3.6L V6 Engine

472

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 458.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 466 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

473

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



474




475




476

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 478Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 478Online Owner Center ................................. 481Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 482Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 482GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 483Roadside Assistance Program ................... 484Courtesy Transportation ............................. 487Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 489Collision Damage Repair ........................... 490

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 494Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 494Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 494Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 495Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 495

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

477

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Buick. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourGM dealer’s sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the BuickCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number. This is availablefrom the vehicle registration or title, or theplate at the top left of the instrument panel.

• Dealership name and location

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting Buick, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.That is why we suggest you follow Step One first ifyou have a concern.

478

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with your newvehicle. However, in the United States, if youcontinue to remain unsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One and Two, youshould file with the BBB Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action, useof the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

479

STEP THREE — Canadian Owner: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps one and two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at thefollowing address. Your inquiry should beaccompanied by your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

480

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

481

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Buick has TTY equipment available at itsCustomer Assistance Center. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Buick by dialing:1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance OfficesBuick encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Buick, the letter should beaddressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceBuick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

www.Buick.com1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

482

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required foryour vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

483

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S. call 1-800-252-1112.In Canada call 1-800-268-6800.Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.As the proud owner of a new Buick vehicle, youare automatically enrolled in the RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner is noteligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to amaximum coverage of $100.• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the

customer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres inCanada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propane andother alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.If your vehicle will not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership. Inthe U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

484

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of your spare tirein good condition will be covered at no charge.The customer is responsible for the repair orreplacement of the tire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.

We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

485

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt to RoadsideAssistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder Buick’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty for U.S.customers, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs are theresponsibility of the driver.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber, and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers call BuickRoadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112, TTYusers, call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

Buick and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,the claims become excessive in frequency or typeof occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Buick and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.

486

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

487

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts.

In addition, for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through a friend or relative,limited reimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and be supported by originalreceipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

488

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations.

Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair of detectedmalfunctions; other information is stored only in acrash event by computer systems, such as thosecommonly called Event Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle isequipped with StabiliTrak®, steering performance,including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, andlateral acceleration, is also recorded. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles anddriving safety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do notrecord sounds, such as conversation of vehicleoccupants.

489

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and data collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, andsafety performance can be compromised insubsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle was originallybuilt. Genuine GM Collision parts are your bestchoice to assure that your vehicle’s designedappearance, durability, and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintainyour GM New Vehicle Warranty.

490

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle. Arecycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these parts isnot known. Such parts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any relatedfailures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

491

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairswith Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer(OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, as you may becharged at the end of your lease for poor qualityrepairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make sure thatno one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Donot leave the scene of an accident until allmatters have been taken care of. Move yourvehicle only if its position puts you in danger oryou are instructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GMRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 484 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator or write down thedriver’s name, the service’s name, and thephone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

492

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

493

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

494

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify us.

Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your General Motorsdealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin from Helm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

495

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner manualwill include the Maintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00US + Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00US + Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

496

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 341Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 167Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 81Additives, Fuel ............................................ 344Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 449Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 358Air Conditioning .................................. 168, 172Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 183Readiness Light ....................................... 182

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 489

Airbag System ............................................... 66Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 81How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 73Passenger Sensing System ....................... 75Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 80What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 73What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 74When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 71Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 68

Antenna, Backglass ..................................... 283Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio

Antenna System ....................................... 284Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 291Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 187Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 444Care of Safety Belts ................................ 442Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 446Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 443Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 438Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 440Finish Care .............................................. 443Finish Damage ......................................... 446Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 441Leather .................................................... 441Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 445Tires ........................................................ 445Underbody Maintenance ........................... 446Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 447Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 442Weatherstrips ........................................... 442Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 444

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 168

497

Audio System(s) .......................................... 238Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 280Backglass Antenna ................................... 283Care of Your CD Player ........................... 282Care of Your CDs .................................... 282Chime Level Adjustment ........................... 284Radio with CD ........................ 240, 245, 252Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 260Setting the Time ...................................... 239Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 280Understanding Radio Reception ............... 281XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 284

Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 98Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 360Operation ................................................. 114

BBackglass Antenna ...................................... 283Battery ........................................................ 384

Electric Power Management ..................... 163Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 160Run-Down Protection ............................... 164

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 310

BrakeAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 291Emergencies ............................................ 293Parking .................................................... 117System Warning Light .............................. 186

Brakes ........................................................ 381Braking ....................................................... 290Braking in Emergencies ............................... 293Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 109Bulb Replacement ....................................... 394

Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ...... 397Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 394Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 391License Plate Lamps ................................ 400Replacement Bulbs .................................. 400Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps ........... 398Buying New Tires ........................................ 418

498

CCalibration ................................................... 206California Fuel ............................................. 344California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 341Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 454Carbon Monoxide .............. 100, 122, 314, 327Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 442Your CD Player ........................................ 282Your CDs ................................................. 282

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 272Center Console Storage Area ...................... 142Center Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 31Center Seat .................................................. 14Chains, Tire ................................................. 424Charging System Light ................................ 185Check

Engine Light ............................................ 190Check Gas Cap Light .................................. 199Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 348Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 446

Child RestraintsChild Restraint Systems ............................. 45Infants and Young Children ........................ 42Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 51Older Children ........................................... 39Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position .......................................... 58Securing a Child Restraint in the Center

Front Seat Position ................................. 61Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ................................. 61Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 50

Chime Level Adjustment .............................. 284Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 168Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 444Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 443Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 440Finish Care .............................................. 443Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 438Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 441Leather .................................................... 441Tires ........................................................ 445

499

Cleaning (cont.)Underbody Maintenance ........................... 446Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 442Weatherstrips ........................................... 442Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 444

Climate Control System ............................... 168Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 178Dual Automatic ......................................... 172Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 177

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 490Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 35Compact Spare Tire .................................... 437Compass ..................................................... 206Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 104Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 290Convenience Net ......................................... 142Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 189Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 188Heater, Engine ......................................... 112Low Warning Light ................................... 189

Cooling System ........................................... 370Courtesy Lamps .......................................... 161Cruise Control ............................................. 154Cruise Control Light .................................... 195Cupholder(s) ................................................ 141

Customer Assistance InformationCourtesy Transportation ........................... 487Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users .......................................... 482Customer Assistance Offices .................... 482Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 478GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 483Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 495Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 494Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 494Roadside Assistance Program .................. 484Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 495

DDaytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System .................................... 159Defensive Driving ........................................ 286Delayed Entry Lighting ................................ 162Delayed Exit Lighting ................................... 162Delayed Locking ............................................ 97DIC Compass .............................................. 206Disc, MP3 ................................................... 272

500

Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 342Door

Ajar Light ................................................. 197Automatic Door Lock ................................. 98Delayed Locking ........................................ 97Locks ......................................................... 96Power Door Locks ..................................... 97Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 98Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 98

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 22

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 199DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 200DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 229DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 208

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 303City .......................................................... 308Defensive ................................................. 286Drunken ................................................... 287Freeway ................................................... 309Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 312In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 305Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 319Winter ...................................................... 314

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 172

EElectric Power Management ........................ 163Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 449Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 450Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 449Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 450Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 450Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 452Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 449

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 358Battery ..................................................... 384Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 195Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 190Coolant .................................................... 363Coolant Heater ......................................... 112Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 189Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 188Drive Belt Routing .................................... 472Engine Compartment Overview ................ 350Exhaust ................................................... 122Oil ........................................................... 353Oil Life System ........................................ 356

501

Engine (cont.)Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 370Overheating ............................................. 367Reduced Power Light ............................... 196Starting .................................................... 111

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................ 295Entry Lighting .............................................. 161Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 489Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 38Exterior Lamps ............................................ 158Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................... 160

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 358Finish Damage ............................................ 446Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 150Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 153Flat Tire ...................................................... 425Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 426Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 435

FluidAutomatic Transaxle ................................. 360Power Steering ........................................ 378Windshield Washer .................................. 380

Fog Lamps .................................................. 160Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 14Fuel ............................................................ 343

Additives .................................................. 344California Fuel .......................................... 344Check Gas Cap Light .............................. 199Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 348Filling Your Tank ...................................... 346Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 345Gage ....................................................... 198Gasoline Octane ...................................... 343Gasoline Specifications ............................ 344Low Warning Light ................................... 198

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 450Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 450Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 452Windshield Wiper ..................................... 449

502

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 189Fuel ......................................................... 198Speedometer ........................................... 181Tachometer .............................................. 181

Garage Door Opener ................................... 130Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 343Specifications ........................................... 344

Glove Box ................................................... 141GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 483

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 150Head Restraints ............................................ 13Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 391Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 449Headlamps

Bulb Replacement .................................... 394Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System ................................ 159

Headlamps (cont.)Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 153Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ...... 397Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 394Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps .......... 395High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 153Suggested Light ....................................... 196

Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ............. 395Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heater ......................................................... 168Heater ......................................................... 172Highbeam On Light ..................................... 196Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 311Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 312Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 348Release ................................................... 349

Horn ............................................................ 150How to Use This Manual ................................ 3How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 21

503

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 109Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 42Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 409Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 148Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 161Cluster ..................................................... 180

Interior Lamps ............................................. 161

JJump Starting .............................................. 385

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 89Keys ............................................................. 87

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 403Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 164Courtesy .................................................. 161Electric Power Management ..................... 163Exterior .................................................... 158Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 160Fog .......................................................... 160Interior ..................................................... 161Overhead Console Reading ..................... 163Rear Assist Handle Reading .................... 163

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 51

License Plate Lamps ................................... 400Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 182Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 187Brake System Warning ............................. 186Change Engine Oil ................................... 195Charging System ..................................... 185Check Gas Cap ....................................... 199Cruise Control .......................................... 195

504

Light (cont.)Door Ajar ................................................. 197Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 188Headlamps Suggested ............................. 196Highbeam On .......................................... 196Low Coolant Warning ............................... 189Low Fuel Warning .................................... 198Low Washer Fluid Warning ...................... 197Malfunction Indicator ................................ 190Oil Pressure ............................................. 194Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 183Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 182Reduced Engine Power ............................ 196Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 181Security ................................................... 195Service Vehicle Soon ............................... 197TCS Warning Light .................................. 187Tire Pressure ........................................... 190Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ... 187Trunk Ajar ................................................ 197

LightingDelayed Entry .......................................... 162Delayed Exit ............................................ 162Entry ........................................................ 161Perimeter ................................................. 163Theater Dimming ..................................... 162

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 319

Lockout Protection ......................................... 99Locks

Automatic Door Lock ................................. 98Delayed Locking ........................................ 97Door .......................................................... 96Lockout Protection ..................................... 99Power Door ............................................... 97Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 98Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 98

Loss of Control ........................................... 302Low Coolant Warning Light .......................... 189Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 198Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ................. 197Lumbar

Power Controls .......................................... 10

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 464At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 467At Least Once a Month ............................ 467At Least Once a Year .............................. 468Introduction .............................................. 458Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 465Maintenance Record ................................ 473Maintenance Requirements ...................... 458

505

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................... 471Owner Checks and Services .................... 466Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 470Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 462Using ....................................................... 459Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 459

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 190Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 208Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview ................... 124Automatic Dimming Rearview with

OnStar® ................................................ 125Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 124Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 124Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 126Outside Power Heated Mirrors ................. 126Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 125

MP3 ............................................................ 272MyGMLink.com ............................................ 481

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 109Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 471

OOdometer .................................................... 181Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 300Oil

Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 195Engine ..................................................... 353Pressure Light .......................................... 194

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 356Older Children, Restraints ............................. 39Online Owner Center ................................... 481OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 126Other Warning Devices ................................ 150Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 177Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 167Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 126Power Heated Mirrors .............................. 126Power Mirrors .......................................... 125

Overhead Console Reading Lamps ............. 163Overheated Engine Protection Operating

Mode ....................................................... 370Owner Checks and Services ....................... 466Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

506

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 446Park Aid ...................................................... 164Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 118Shifting Out of ......................................... 120

ParkingAssist ....................................................... 164Brake ....................................................... 117Over Things That Burn ............................ 121

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 183Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 178Passenger Sensing System ........................... 75Passing ....................................................... 300PASS-Key® III ............................................. 106PASS-Key® III Operation ............................. 107Perimeter Lighting ....................................... 163Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 167Door Locks ................................................ 97Electrical System ..................................... 450Lumbar Controls ........................................ 10Reduced Engine Light .............................. 196

Power (cont.)Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 110Seat ............................................................ 9Steering Fluid .......................................... 378Windows .................................................. 103

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 38Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ........... 98

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 20

RRadiator Pressure Cap ................................ 367Radios ........................................................ 238

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 282Care of Your CDs .................................... 282Radio with CD ........................ 240, 245, 252Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 260Setting the Time ...................................... 239Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 280Understanding Reception ......................... 281

Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps ............ 163

507

Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 98Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 35Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 32Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming ............ 124Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

OnStar® ................................................... 125Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 124Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 124Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 11Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 470Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 326Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 196Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 89Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 90Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................ 429Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 427Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 400Replacement, Windshield ............................. 401Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 494General Motors ........................................ 495United States Government ....................... 494

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 82Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 83Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 110Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 30Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 484Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 319Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 472Running the Engine While Parked ............... 123

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 182Pretensioners ............................................. 38Reminder Light ........................................ 181

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 442Center Front Passenger Position ................ 31Driver Position ........................................... 22How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 21

508

Safety Belts (cont.)Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 20Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 35Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 32Right Front Passenger Position .................. 30Safety Belt Extender .................................. 38Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 30Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 16Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 29

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 462Seats

Center Seat ............................................... 14Head Restraints ......................................... 13Heated Seats ............................................. 10Power Lumbar ........................................... 10Power Seats ................................................ 9Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 11Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 14

Securing a Child RestraintCenter Front Seat Position ......................... 61Rear Seat Position ..................................... 58Right Front Seat Position ........................... 61

Security Light .............................................. 195

Service ........................................................ 340Accessories and Modifications .................. 341Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 343California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 341Doing Your Own Work ............................. 342Engine Soon Light ................................... 190Publications Ordering Information ............. 495Vehicle Soon Light ................................... 197

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 80Setting the Time .......................................... 239Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 445Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 118Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 120Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 29Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 152Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 437Installing .................................................. 429Removing ................................................ 427Storing ..................................................... 435

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 454Speedometer ............................................... 181Split Folding Rear Seat ................................. 14StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 296

509

Starting Your Engine ................................... 111Steering ...................................................... 297Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 280Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 151Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 142Convenience Net ..................................... 142Cupholder(s) ............................................ 141Glove Box ................................................ 141

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 318Sun Visors .................................................. 104Sunroof ....................................................... 143

TTachometer ................................................. 181Taillamps

Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps .................................... 398

TCS Warning Light ...................................... 187Theater Dimming ......................................... 162Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 280Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 104

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 104PASS-Key® III .......................................... 106PASS-Key® III Operation .......................... 107

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 151Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 190Tires ........................................................... 402

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 444

Buying New Tires ..................................... 418Chains ..................................................... 424Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 426Cleaning .................................................. 445Compact Spare Tire ................................. 437Different Size ........................................... 420If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 425Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 409Inspection and Rotation ............................ 416Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 429Pressure Monitor System ......................... 411Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 429Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 427Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 435Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 403Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 406Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 421Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 422Wheel Replacement ................................. 422When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 417

510

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 326Towing a Trailer ....................................... 327Your Vehicle ............................................. 325

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 294Control System Warning Light .................. 187Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ............. 295StabiliTrak® System ................................. 296

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 360

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 114Trunk .......................................................... 100Trunk Ajar Light ........................................... 197Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 152Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 152

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 164Understanding Radio Reception ................... 281Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 421Universal Home Remote System ................. 130

Operation ........................................ 131, 137

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 290Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 319Service Soon Light ................................... 197Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders ................................................ 489

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 448Service Parts Identification Label .............. 448

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 229

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 177Visors .......................................................... 104

511

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 179Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 208Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 150Other Warning Devices ............................ 150Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ................ 197Wheels

Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 422Different Size ........................................... 420Replacement ............................................ 422

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 50Windows ..................................................... 102

Power ...................................................... 103

WindshieldReplacement ............................................ 401Washer .................................................... 154Washer Fluid ........................................... 380Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 401Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 444Wiper Fuses ............................................ 449Wipers ..................................................... 153

Winter Driving ............................................. 314

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 278XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 284

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 459

512

Date post:	19-Mar-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times

2007 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M · 2020-03-15 · This manual describes features that may be...

Documents